John William Burgon
Institute for Study of Ancient
Manuscripts, Texts and Papyri

Home
KJV Collection
 
Back
 

The Books and the Parchments

By

F. F. Bruce

London: Pickering & Ingilis

1950

Boise, Idaho: Global Affairs Publishing Company
P. O. Box 16184. Boise, Idaho 83715

Copyright © 2007 by Michael L. Chadwick. All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2007 of Electronic Texts by Michael L. Chadwick. All rights reserved. No part of this electronic text may be reproduced, distributed, stored in electronic databases, personal computers, search engine databases, web sites or transmitted in any form or by any means, including photocopying, recording, or other electronic or mechanical methods without the prior written permission of the publisher. Electronic fingerprints have been placed in the text to prevent copyright violations.
 

Table of Contents

Preface

Chapter 1—The Books and the Parchments

Chapter 2—The Bible and the Alphabet

Chapter 3—The Hebrew Language

Chapter 4―The Aramaic Language

Chapter 5―The Greek Language

Chapter 6―The Two Testaments

Chapter 7―The Form of the Bible

Chapter 8―The Canon of Scripture

Chapter 9―The Text of the Old Testament

Chapter 10—The Samaritan Pentateuch

Chapter 11―The Targums

Chapter 12―The Old Testament in Greek

Chapter 13―The Apocryphal Books

Chapter 14—The Text of the New Testament

Chapter 15―The Syriac Bible

Chapter 16―The Latin Bible

Chapter 17—Other Early Versions

Chapter 18―The English Bible

Appendix I—Lost Books

Appendix II―The New Testament Apocrypha and Other Early Christian Books

Appendix III―Suggestions for Further Study

Preface

     This volume gathers together a number of articles written and papers read at various times on the transmission of the Bible. It is intended for non-specialists like those who have read them or heard them in their earlier forms, and who have frequently expressed a desire to have them in this form.

     It is gratifying to mark the eagerness with which people of widely divergent interests listen to a simple account of how the Bible has come down to us. In revising these chapters I have tried to bear in mind the questions which are most frequently asked about these matters, and to answer them to the best of my ability. I hope that the volume may thus prove interesting and useful to the many who, without aiming at any specialist knowledge of Biblical learning, would welcome a handbook dealing with these questions.

     The mixed origin of the contents no doubt betrays itself in a certain haphazardness in the topics selected, though I have tried to smooth out the worst roughnesses and cut down too much overlapping.

     The three chapters on the Biblical languages are not intended to teach readers the elements of these languages but simply to say some interesting things about them.

     There are many aspects of Biblical study which are not touched upon here. Questions of higher criticism, introduction, exegesis, and even of Biblical archaeology, interesting as they are, lie outside the scope of the volume. So also does the theological approach to the Bible (although theology has done its best to creep into Chapters VI, VII, and VIII). The background of the work, however, is the conviction that (in the words of the Shorter Catechism) ‘the word of God, which is contained in the Scriptures of the Old and New Testaments, is the only rule to direct us how we may glorify and enjoy Him’, and thus attain the chief end and highest good of our existence.

     There is little that is original in these pages, and my debts to others are acknowledged throughout the work. In all that concerns the text of the Old Testament, whether in its original Hebrew or in early versions, I must (in common with all students of these matters) make particular acknowledgment of the help received from the writings of Dr. Paul Kahle, the quintessence of whose life-work has lately been made accessible to English readers in The Cairo Geniza. Mr. G. C. D. Howley has given valued help in the reading of the proofs. Nor should I omit a word of gratitude to all those whose keen interest in the subjects here dealt with has encouraged me to present them in this form. A teacher of any subject, and especially of Biblical studies, can have no greater reward than to see others fired with enthusiasm for his subject.—F. F. Bruce

Department of Biblical History and Literature,

University of Sheffield,

March, 1950.

Chapter 1—The Books and the Parchments

     About the middle of last century there came to light a letter in William Tyndale’s hand, written in Latin to someone in authority (possibly the Marquis of Bergen), which had lain unread in the archives of the Council of Brabant for three hundred years. The letter has a special human interest because it was written during the last winter of Tyndale’s life (1535-36) while he lay in prison ‘for the word of God and the testimony of Jesus’, and it shows us how the great Bible translator’s enthusiasm for his work remained unimpaired to the last, in spite of the most discouraging circumstances. This is what he wrote:

     “I believe, right worshipful, that you are not unaware of what may have been determined concerning me. Wherefore I beg your lordship, and that by the Lord Jesus, that if I am to remain here through the winter, you will request the commissary to have the kindness to send me, from the goods of mine which he has, a warmer cap, for I suffer greatly from cold in the head, and am afflicted by a perpetual catarrh, which is much increased in this cell; a warmer coat also, for this which I have is very thin; a piece of cloth, too, to patch my leggings.

     My overcoat is worn out; my shirts also are worn out. He has a woolen shirt, if he will be good enough to send it. I have also with him leggings of thicker cloth to put on above; he has also warmer night-caps. And I ask to be allowed to have a lamp in the evening; it is indeed wearisome sitting alone in the dark.

     But most of all I beg and beseech your clemency to be urgent with the commissary, that he will kindly permit me to have the Hebrew Bible, Hebrew grammar and Hebrew dictionary, that I may pass the time in that study. In return may you obtain what you most desire, so only that it be for the salvation of your soul. But if any other decision has been taken concerning me, to be carried out before winter, I will be patient, abiding the will of God, to the glory of the grace of my Lord Jesus Christ; whose Spirit (I pray) may ever direct your heart. Amen.

                              W. Tindalus

     It requires little imagination to sympathize with his desire for warmer clothes; a damp, draughty, unheated cell is no place to pass the winter in, and it is difficult to concentrate the mind on study if the body is shivering.     But we get the impression that Tyndale’s desire for warmer clothes was but a means to an end; he wished to reduce his bodily discomfort sufficiently to let his mind get on with its chosen work.     Most of all he wants his Hebrew books. And why? Because a good part of the Old Testament remained to be translated. Some years previously he had translated the New Testament into English (the first time that it had ever been englished from the Greek original), and he was at work on the first translation of the Old Testament from Hebrew into English when he was arrested. The Pentateuch had been published in 1530; the historical books had also been translated but not yet published. So he was anxious to press on with the task. But the completion of it must be left to others; on the 6th October, Tyndale himself, in the words of John Foxe, ‘was brought forth to the place of execution, was there tied to the stake, and then strangled first by the hangman, and afterwards with fire consumed, in the morning at the town of Vilvorde, A.D. 1536; crying thus at the stake with a fervent zeal and a loud voice: “Lord, open the King of England’s eyes”’.

     We cannot read the letter which Tyndale wrote from prison without remembering the remarkably similar request made by the Apostle Paul in remarkably similar circumstances. It was just before the last winter of his life, while he lay in prison in Rome awaiting the death-sentence and the executioner’s sword (according to the traditional account), that he sent a message to his friend, Timothy, in Asia Minor: ‘Do your best to come to me soon.... When you come, bring the cloak that I left at Troas with Carpus, and the books, especially the parchments.... Do your best to come before winter’.

     [There is an interesting reference to this passage of Scripture in F. W. Newman’s Phases of Faith (1850), pp. 29 f. In recording his intercourse with one whom he calls ‘the Irish Clergyman’ (actually J. H. Darby), Newman says: “I once said: But do you really think that no part of the New Testament may have been temporary in its object? For istance, what should we have lost if St. Pual had never written the verse, ‘The cloak which I have left at Troas, bring with thee, and the books, but especially the parchments.’ He answered with the greatest promptitude: “I should certainly have lost something; for that is exactly the verse which alone saved me from selling my little library. No! every word, depend upon it, is from the Spirit, and is for eternal service.”’]

     The comfort of the body is not to be neglected, but something to occupy the mind is the main thing. ‘Most of all … the Hebrew Bible’ was Tyndale’s plea; ‘especially the parchments’ was Paul’s.

     It has been suggested that the word translated ‘cloak’ in Paul’s message was not really a cloak. The Greek word is phailonēs, borrowed from the Latin paenula; and sometimes it means a piece of cloth to wrap round books to protect them against the weather. And it is suggested that Paul was more concerned about protecting his books than about protecting his body. Perhaps we can have it both ways. Paul may have left his cloak at Troas wrapped round the books, but in view of his reference to the approach of winter it is not difficult to surmise that he asked Timothy to bring it so that he could wrap it round himself. And then, with a little less discomjfort, he could get down to the books and the parchments.

     But what were these books, and what were the parchments which Paul was so specially anxious to have? The Greek words that he uses to indicate them are interesting; they denote primarily

the material of which the two classes of documents were made. The word for ‘book’ is biblion, and that for ‘parchment’ is membrana.

     A biblion was more particularly a roll of papyrus or byblus. This was a reed-plant, growing beside rivers and marshes and such places, the inner bark of which was extracted and dried in flat strips.     When these strips were dried, a row of them was laid side by side, and above this another row was laid in criss-cross fashion, and the two rows were gummed together. The result was a piece of writing material. Several of these pieces could be joined together end to end so as to form a long strip which was then rolled up into a scroll of convenient size, called in Greek a biblos or biblion. This name was derived from one of the names of the plant itself, byblos, which was derived in turn from the name of a town in Phoenicia which the Greeks knew as Byblos.

     [Its Phoenician name was Begal: in this form it is named in the Old Testament (Psa. 83. 7; Ezek. 27. 9; its inhabitants are called Bebalites in Josh. 13. 5; 1 Kings 5. 18). See further on page 21 f., 29.]

     (The form biblion is really a diminutive of biblos, but lost its diminutive sense. In the New Testament biblion simply means a ‘roll’ or ‘book’; when a diminutive word is required, as for the little book which John was told to eat in Rev. 10. 9, the form biblaridion is used.) It is from biblion, in fact, that our word ‘Bible’ is derived. The plural of biblion is biblia, and the whole collection of Old and New Testament books came to be known by Greek-speaking Christians as to biblia, ‘the books’. Latin-speaking Christians then borrowed the word biblia but treated it as a singular noun, and from its Latin use the English word ‘Bible’' and similar forms in many other languages have been derived.

     The other documents which Paul asked Timothy to bring were parchments. The Greek word here is membrana, a word borrowed from Latin, from which, of course, comes our English word ‘membrane’. This is an animal and not a vegetable product, the skin of sheep, goats, antelopes, and similar animals, which was shaved and scraped to provide a more durable writing material than papyrus. The word ‘parchment’ comes from the name of the city of Pergamum, in Asia Minor, for the production of this writing material was at one time specially associated with that place. Another name for the same material is vellum.

     In New Testament times parchment, being more durable and more costly than papyrus, was used chiefly for documents of greater value, or for such as were constantly in use and were, therefore, exposed to greater wear and tear. What the parchments were which Paul so particularly desired Timothy to bring we cannot be sure, but it is a reasonable guess that they contained portions of Holy Scripture.

     A book with pages in the form familiar to us was not used in New Testament times, though this kind of book (known technically as a codex) made its appearance not long after the end of the

apostolic age and quickly became popular in Christian circles. The books mentioned in the Bible were rolls of papyrus. The use of papyrus for writing purposes in Egypt goes back to c. 3000 B.C., and we have evidence that by the end of the twelfth century B. C. it was exported in large quantities from Egypt to Phoenicia for the same purpose. Such a papyrus roll is that which John saw in his vision of heaven (Rev. 5. 1), which contained so much writing that the outside (verso) was covered with it as well as the inside (recto), and which when rolled up was secured with seven seals. Usually rolls bore writing on one side only, the side on which the fibres ran horizontally and which was therefore easier to write on. The Roman poet Juvenal satirizes one of his contemporaries who wrote a tragedy called Orestes, which was inordinately long—so long that it covered the outside of a roll as well as the inside, and was not finished even then:

scriptus et in tergo necdum finitus Orestes!

[‘Orestes, written on the back as well and even so

not yet finished’ (Juvenal, Satire, i. 6).]

     The longest books of the New Testament (which, in descending order of length, are Luke, Acts, Matthew, John) represent the amount of written matter which a roll of normal size contained. A roll could not exceed a certain length without becoming inconvenient for use. One of the reasons why Christian communities so quickly adopted the codex form in preference to the roll form, from the beginning of the second century onwards, was probably that the new form allowed them to have several documents together in one book, such as the four Gospels, or the collection of Pauline epistles, and later, of course, the New Testament or even the whole Bible. The writing on a roll was arranged in columns of convenient breadth. In the account of the roll of Jeremiah’s prophecies that was read in the presence of King Jehoiakim (Jer. 36. 21-25), it was not three or four leaves that Jehudi read, as the text of the A.V. and R.V. says, but three or four columns, as the R.V. margin rightly has it; Jehudi had no time to read more, for the king seized the roll, cut it up and threw it into the brazier. As the roll was read it was unwound with one hand and wound up with the other, rollers being provided round which it could more easily be wound.

     When the roll was wound up, a slip containing the title of the work and the name of the author was usually pasted on the outside. This could easily fall off, leaving the work without a name. It may be that something like this happened to the Epistle to the Hebrews. This Epistle bears no writer’s name, although it was not intended to be an anonymous letter; its recipients no doubt knew quite well who had sent it to them. A number of rolls would be kept together in a cylindrical box, which the Romans called a capsa. If an anonymous roll were kept in a box along with a number of other rolls by a known author, the nameless roll was apt to be credited to that author too. Thus, if the Epistle to the Hebrews was kept along with letters of Paul, it was not unnatural that Paul’s name should come to be attached to it.

     For writing on papyrus or parchment a pen and ink were used, as is indicated in 3 John 13, where the Elder has much to say to Gaius which he is unwilling to communicate by means of ‘ink and pen’.     (In a similar passage in 2 John 12 the phrase ‘paper and ink’ is used, where the Greek word for ‘paper’ is chartēs, another word for papyrus.) The pen was a reed (Greek kalamos), pointed at the end. The ink was compounded of charcoal, gum and water; the Greek word used by John is simply melan, i.e. ‘black’.

     Temporary notes were often made with a metal stylus or stiletto on a wax tablet—a flat piece of wood covered with a film of wax.     The writing could be effaced by being rubbed over with the blunt end of the stylus. A very widespread writing material favoured by the common people was a piece of unglazed pottery, which readily took ink. Great numbers of these inscribed potsherds—ostraca, to give them their technical name—have been found in Egypt and Palestine. They served for writing letters, for keeping accounts, and a hundred and one other purposes.

     The most durable form of writing is that referred to in Job 19. 24, the engraving of rock-inscriptions with an ‘iron pen’. Another very durable form of writing, widely used in the Middle East in Old Testament times, was with a sharp instrument on tablets of soft clay, which were then baked hard. Vast quantities of these clay tablets have come to light, principally in the Euphrates-Tigris valley, where the kingdoms of Babylonia and Assyria flourished, but also in Persia, Syria, Asia Minor and Egypt. A line incised in a clay tablet with the three-sided stylus with bevelled head favoured for this purpose was naturally thicker at the beginning of the stroke than at the end, and this produces the characteristic appearance of the wedge-shaped or `cuneiform' script in which so many languages of Western Asia were written.

     These brick tablets were very durable, but their bulk and weight made them terribly inconvenient. Our paper books are heavy enough in all conscience, as we know to our cost when even a modest library has to be moved by road or rail; but imagination staggers at the problems that would arise if we had to keep their equivalent in inscribed bricks! Papyrus, on the other hand, was very convenient, but not at all durable. Only in such conditions as are provided by the dry sands of Egypt and the volcanic ash of Herculaneum have papyrus documents been preserved; in humid climates they soon rotted away. So, while we can read the original inscriptions of the Assyrian and Babylonian kings and the notes which common people wrote on pieces of pottery in eighth-century Samaria and sixth-century Lachish, the autographs of the Hebrew prophets who were their contemporaries have disappeared long ago, as also have the autographs of all the other Biblical writers, most—probably all—of whom wrote on papyrus. But these autographs were copied before they perished, and throughout the intervening centuries they have been copied and re-copied continually. Until the invention of printing five centuries ago all this copying had to be done laboriously by hand, one copy at a time; since then, the printing presses have sent out whole editions where previously single manuscripts were produced by individual scribes.

Chapter 2—The Bible and the Alphabet

     When we speak of the Bible, we use a word which originally referred to a particular kind of writing material. When we speak of the Scriptures, we use a word which etymologically denotes the writing and not the material. We have discussed the early forms of writing material; now we are to think of early forms of writing.

     The invention of printing in Europe in the fifteenth century A.D. was an event of great importance in the history of the transmission of the Biblical text, as well as in the general history of culture. But we sometimes forget that it is far outweighed in importance by the invention of writing. Without the invention of writing we should have had no Bible at all, for the Bible is God’s Word written. God’s Word came to the fathers through the prophets and became incarnate in Jesus Christ; but we should be very much poorer if we had no written record of what God said but had to rely on oral tradition. That, of course, might have mattered less if phonographic methods of recording the spoken word had been in use in Biblical times. But these methods are, in fact, of recent invention, whereas writing was in use in those days and so was naturally the means employed for perpetuating the revelation of God.

     The first person who is represented in the Bible as writing anything is Moses. There are six things which Moses in the Pentateuch is explicitly said to have written: (1) the memorial concerning Amalek; [Exod. 17. 14.] (2) the Book of the Covenant; [Exod. 24. 4.] (3) the Ten Commandments; [Exod. 34. 27, 28.] (4) the itinerary of the Israelites in the wilderness; [Num. 33. 2.] (5) the Deuteronomic law-code; [Deut. 31. 9. 24.] (6) the Song reproduced in Deut. 32. [Deut. 31. 22.] At one time it was widely supposed that Moses was the first man who ever committed anything to writing, and that he learned the art directly from God * (possibly when he received the two Tables of the Law at Sinai inscribed by ‘the finger of God’). [Exod. 31. 18.]

     [* The idea is at least as early as the second century B.C., when it was put forward by the Hellenistic Jewish writer, Eupolemus. It is interesting, however, to note that Josephus ascribes the art of writing to the generations immediately following Adam, perhaps thinking particularly of Enoch, who is regarded by some forms of Jewish and Samaritan tradition as having committed divine revelations to writing.]

     This was a perfectly reasonable supposition in days when no writing was known earlier than the time of Moses; now, however, we can look at actual records written many hundreds of years before Moses, written more than 5,000 years ago.

     Writing is not the only method of keeping memoranda and communicating information otherwise than by word of mouth; other devices are known, such as those practised by the American

Indians and by the Peruvians in the Inca Age. But none of these other devices has proved capable of being developed to anything like the same degree as writing. Writing developed out of drawing; and something of the development of the art of writing can be grasped if we compare a modern treatise on some abstract subject with the earliest known forms of picture-writing.

     The form of writing with which we are specially concerned in this chapter, however, is alphabetic writing, not simply because it is the form of writing which we practise ourselves (by contrast, for example, with the Chinese), but especially because the Bible, as far as we can tell, was from the beginning written in alphabetic writing. Alphabetic writing is the form of writing which has a distinct character for every significant sound in a language—in principle, at least, for in practice (as we know in English) the same sound may be indicated by more letters than one and the same letter may be pronounced in more ways than one.

     [Thus the same sound is denoted by c., as in car; by k, as in kerb; by kh, as in khaki; by ck, as in sack; by ch, as in chasm; by gh, as in hough. The letter g is pronounced differently in get and gem; and think of the variety of ways in which gh is pronounced! English, of course, is a notorious example of defective correspondence between sound and symbol; but the same defect is present in degree in all written languages.]'

     In tracing the development of writing in general and of alphabetic writing in particular it is a good scheme to begin with our own alphabet and work backward, for then we are proceeding from the well known to the less well known, and that is always a sound method. Our English alphabet has twenty-six letters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMN0PQRSTUVWXYZ. We need concern ourselves only with the capitals; the ‘lower case’ letters are simply modifications of these. We have inherited our alphabet in the first instance from the Romans, along with several other useful things. The Roman alphabet, however, had only twenty-three letters: A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T V X Y Z.     Our I and J are by origin variant forms of one and the same Roman letter; the same is true of U and V; while W is just what we call it, a double U (or, as the French call it, a double V). As for the Latin alphabet of twenty-three letters, its last two letters, Y and Z, were imported from the Greek alphabet in the first century B.C., not to represent true Latin sounds, but to help the Romans to represent certain Greek words more accurately in their alphabet—those Greek words containing the letters Υ (upsilon), which was pronounced like the modified u in French or the German , and Z (zeta), which was pronounced like dz or zd. Neither of these sounds was found in any native Latin word.     Before these two letters were appended, then, the Roman alphabet had only twenty-one letters.

     The Romans in their turn received the alphabet from the Etruscans, and the Etruscans received it from the Greeks—more particularly from those Greeks who had settled in Southern Italy from the eighth to the sixth centuries B.C. There were variations between the various forms of alphabets used by the Greeks, but in all of them the third letter, Γ (gamma), had the voiced sound of g as in English gather. How comes it, then, that the third letter in the Roman alphabet, C, has the unvoiced sound of c as in English can? It is not that the Romans had no use for the voiced sound of g; they had, and if they had derived their alphabet direct from the Greeks, they would have pronounced C like Greek gamma, the more so as there were already two letters in the alphabet which had the sound of c in can—namely K and Q. but the Etruscans had no voiced g sound in their language, so when they took over the Greek alphabet they gave gamma the corresponding unvoiced sound (as though the name of the letter were pronounced kamma). Thus, in the alphabet which the Romans took over from the Etruscans, there were three letters which had practically the same unvoiced sound—C, K, and Q. Later, when the Romans felt the need of a separate letter for the g sound, they used G, which was really a variant form of C, and put it in the seventh place in the alphabet was the place occupied by the Greek letter zeta, but, as we have seen, the Romans had no such sound, and so they jettisoned it from the alphabet, little thinking that their descendants would one day bring it back and put it at the end of the alphabet. They also jettisoned five other letters from the Greek alphabet since they had no sounds corresponding to them.

     There were numerous varieties of the Greek alphabet in use all over the Greek world, from Asia Minor to Marseilles. One of these was the ‘West Greek’ alphabet, from which the Roman alphabet was derived through Etruscan intermediation. Another was the ‘East Greek’ or ‘Ionic’ alphabet, which was introduced at Athens in 403 B.C., and in time replaced the local varieties of alphabet in other parts of Greece. This is the alphabet of twenty-four letters which we commonly call the ‘Greek alphabet’. The following table will help to show the relation which these two forms of Greek alphabet bore to each other and to the Roman alphabet. Note that, so far as the table goes, it indicates the relationship of the letters and not of the sounds which they represented.

     [This table is simplified; the earlier inscriptions in each of these alphabets show a greater variety of forms than it is necessary to indicate here. The three letters omitted from the san or sampi to denote 900 (for which purpose it was placed after omega, the sign for 800), and koppa to denote 90. Twenty-seven letters instead of the normal twenty-four of the Ionic alphabet were required to denote the numerals, the units from 1 to 9, the tens from 10 to 90, and the hundreds from 100 to 900; hence these three letters, otherwise jettisoned, were still used in this way. Similarly, three Greek letters which were not used in the Latin alphabet were employed as Latin numerals: Ө (theta) as 100 (later simplified to C, the more naturally as C is the initial of Lat. Centum, ‘hundred’; Φ (phi) as 1,000 (later simplified to M., the more naturally as M is the initial of Lat. Mille, ‘thousand’); the sign Φ when halved (D) denoted the half of 1,000 (500); Ψ (West Greek khi, Ionic psi) denoted 50 (it was simplified to and then to L).]

     One of the chief differences between the West Greek and the Ionic alphabet is that in the former H represents an aspirate sound, while in the latter (since most of the Ionic Greeks dropped their aitches) there was no need of a letter to indicate the aspirate sound, and so H (eta) was used to represent a long open e sound, similar to the sound of ea in English bear. In this as in some other respects, such as its retention of the letters digamma (whence F) and koppa (whence Q), and its giving to X the value of ks and not kh, the West Greek alphabet, along with the Roman alphabet, was nearer to the original Greek alphabet than the Ionic alphabet was. The earliest inscriptions in the Greek alphabet occur in Athens and the islands of Thera, Melos and Crete; they belong to the ninth or eighth century B.C.

     Greek tradition derives the alphabet from the Phoenicians. It is significant that Cadmus, whom the Greeks regarded as having introduced the alphabet among them, was not only a Phoenician according to legend, but bears a Phoenician name. The Cadmus legend is well worth studying for its own sake, but all we need to say here is that the traditional Greek ascription of their alphabet to the Phoenicians is confirmed by the actual facts of the case. The earliest form of the Greek alphabet is the Phoenician alphabet, with a few adaptations to the necessities of the Greek language, which was a totally different language from the Semitic tongue of the Phoenicians. The most important of these adaptations was the use of five Phoenician letters (which in the Semitic alphabet represented three gutturals and two semi-vowels) to indicate Greek vowels.

     [Why five? There were seven distinct simple vowel-sounds in classical Greek (quite apart from differences of quantity)— those represented in the Ionic alphabet by α, ε, η, ι, ο, υ, ω. But there were five vowels in the Cypriote syllabary, and possibly the pre-Greek system of writing which originated in Crete and spread from there to Cyprus and elsewhere had some influence on the adaptation of the Phoenician alphabet to Greek usage. Sir George Hill, History of Cyprus, Vol. I (1940), p. 53, where further reference is made to Rhys Carpenter in the American Journal of Archaeology, 42 (1938), p. 67.]

     All twenty-two letters of the Phoenician alphabet represented consonants. Of the five Phoenician letters which the Greeks adapted as vowel-signs, four represented Semitic sounds which were not required in Greek speech. These were the gutturals corresponding to Hebrew א (᾿aleph), ה (he), and צ (‘ayin), and the semi-vowel indicatd in Hebrew by י (yod). But one of the letters used by the Greeks to denote a vowel-sound-Semitic waw, used as Greek Υ (υ, upsilon), was also required by the Greeks in its original function as the letter indicating the semi-vowel w.

     So the Greeks used it twice over in their alphabet, in two variant forms—once in its Semitic position, No. 6, to denote the w sound, and again as an extra letter at the end of the alphabet, No. 23, in its new character as the vowel-letter upsilon. As No. 6 among the Greek letters, with the value of w and the name digamma, it appeared in the West Greek alphabet and most of the other local Greek alphabets, but was lacking in the Ionic alphabet, because the Greeks who originally used the Ionic alphabet stopped using the w sound. It is therefore absent from the classical Greek alphabet, which is based on the Ionic form. The letters which follow υ (upsilon) in the Greek alphabet were added a considerable time after the Greeks originally acquired the alphabet from the Phoenicians and do not concern us at this stage in our inquiry.

     Not only the forms of the Greek letters, but the names of most of them, betray their Semitic origin. For most of the names were taken over into Greek along with the letters. Alpha, beta, gamma, delta, and so on, are meaningless in Greek except as names of the letters which they denote; but the Phoenician names which lie behind them, which are practically identical with the Hebrew forms ᾿aleph, beth, gimel, daleth, and so on, are not only the names of letters but have a meaning of their own besides—they appear for the most part to denote the objects originally represented by the shapes of the respective letters in the earliest form of the Semitic alphabet, namely, ox, house, throw-stick, ** door, etc.

     [** So G. R. Driver, Semitic Writing (1948), pp. 155, 163 f. Another and older suggestion

is that gimel means ‘camel.’ The association between ‘throw-stick’ and ‘camel’ may not appear so far-fetched if we consider that there may be a boomerang-like quality about that animal’s recalcitrance.]

     The Semitic alphabet from which the Greeks derived theirs was written from right to left, as four forms of the Semitic alphabet—Hebrew, Samaritan, Arabic, Syriac—are written to the present day. The earliest Greek writing also ran from right to left. After a time the Greeks introduced the practice of writing alternate lines from right to left and from left to right; this practice was called writing boustrophēdon (ox-turning-wise), as it resembled the alternate directions followed in ploughing, up one furrow and down the next. This was followed by the third stage, in which the left-to-right direction was standardized, and this has remained the direction in which the Greek alphabet (with its derivative, the Roman alphabet) is written to this day.

     This matter of the direction of writing has no such metaphysical significance as some people are inclined to read into it; it is a matter of convention and convenience. For right-handed writers the left-to-right direction has the advantage that one is less likely to smear or deface the words already written. The cuneiform writing of Babylonia and surrounding lands was originally in columns read downwards, arranged from right to left; but after 2500 B.C. or thereabout it regularly ran from left to right. The Egyptian hieroglyphs were usually written from right to left (as the derived hieratic and demotic scripts always were), but sometimes from left to right, and sometimes in vertical columns. The Sinaitic alphabetic script was written indifferently in any of these three directions. The Indian nāgarī script, whose ultimate prototype is the Aramaic form of the Semitic alphabet, is written from left to right. The oldest extant piece of Latin writing runs from right to left (as the early Etruscan alphabet did) this is the inscription of c. 600 B.C. found on a fibula at Prneste (Palestrina) which reads: Manios med hehaked Numasioi (‘Manios made me for Numasios’). [In classical Latin this would be Manius me fecit Numerio (‘Manius made me for Numerius’).] The earliest extant Latin inscription in stone, which is not later than 400 B.C., is written in vertical columns reading from bottom to top and from top to bottom alternately, the letters lying, as it were, on their sides.

     How old is the Phoenician alphabet from which the Greek alphabet is derived? It is found in inscriptions of various kings of Gebal who reigned between the eighteenth and ninth centuries B.C. Gebal, known to the Greeks as Byblos, is (interestingly enough) the city from whose name the Greeks derived one of their names for papyrus [See p. 11.] (and from which in due course our word ‘Bible’

came): we have the record of a large quantity of papyrus which was sent there from Egypt shortly before 1100 B.C.—for what purpose if not for writing? The oldest of these royal inscriptions at Gebal is that of King Shaphatbaal, *** and is dated about 1600 B.C.

     [*** The name means ‘Baal has judged’; cf. the recurring Old Testametn name, Shephatiah (2 Sam. 3. 4, and elsewhere), meaning “Jehovah has judged’.]

     Then we have two inscriptions from the tomb of King Ahiram of the same city, three or four centuries later. There are also shorter inscriptions, such as a piece of pottery bearing the potter’s name, ‘Abda, son of Kelubay the potter’, from about the same time as Shaphatbaal’s inscription, and a bronze spatula bearing an inscription which contains the owner’s name, Azarbaal, roughly contemporary with the Ahiram inscriptions.

     [ The name means “baal has helped’; in its Carthaginian form Hasdrubal, it appears as the name of a brother and brother-in-law of Hannibal. Cf. the Old Testament name, Azariah, meaning ‘Jehovah has helped’.]

     A vessel found in the same city of Gebal, belonging to the time of King Amenemhet IV of Egypt (shortly after 1800 B.C.), has marked on it two signs which are pretty certainly the Phoenician letters ‘ayin and kaph. [See C. F. A. Schaeffer, The Cuneiform Texts of Ras Shamra-Ugarit (1939), p. 36; G. R. Driver, Semitic Writing, p 190.]

     So we can trace the Phoenician alphabet back at least to the eighteenth century B.C. We call it rightly the Phoenician alphabet, because in the present state of our knowledge the Phoenicians

appear to have been the first people to use it, but it is the alphabet which before long came into use throughout Syria and Palestine among other Semitic-speaking peoples beside the Phoenicians, and it is therefore known also by the more general name of the North Semitic alphabet. In this alphabet, for example, we have such documents as the ‘Gezer Calendar’, the oldest piece of Hebrew writing known to be extant, which dates from the time of David or thereabout (c. 1000 B.C.) and contains a list of farming operations month by month; and King Mesha’s Moabite Stone, which gives the Moabite version of the revolt mentioned in 2 Kings i. 1. I (c. 850 B.C.).

     So far we have traced our alphabet back to the Phoenician alphabet of the eighteenth century B.C. without having to postulate missing links. When we come to consider how the alphabet arose, however, we have to exercise a certain degree of imagination.

     The origin of writing long antedates the origin of the alphabet. Simple and convenient as alphabetic writing appears to us, it was at a comparatively late stage in the development of writing that the alphabetic principle made its appearance. In view of the apparent development of writing from drawing, this was inevitable. A picture of an old man, the sun, a bear or a bee, so long as it represents one or other of these objects and nothing else, remains a picture only. We might group the pictures together in such a way as to tell a story of a bear stealing an old man’s honey while he lay asleep in the sun, while the bees buzzed angrily but ineffectively around, but so long as the pictures denoted only these concrete objects they would be nothing more than pictograms. Such picture-writing is not unknown even in modern civilization; it is employed, for example, in advertisements such as those which by a picture-sequence show the wonderful change in a lady’s nervous system on washing-day after she has learned how to make a certain cleansing substance do the hard work for her; [See also D. Diringer, The Alphabet, p. 32.] it is employed, too, and very effectively, in such road-signs as those which indicate the proximity of cross-roads and other types of road junction. [Cf. F. Bodmer and L. Hogben, The Loom of Language (1943), p. 49.]

     But if the picture of an old man is used to express old age, if the picture of the sun is used to express heat, if the picture of the bear is used to suggest a person or perhaps a nation characterized by some quality of bearishness, if the picture of a bee is used to suggest busy-ness (or honey), then we have moved a step—and a long step—in the direction of writing; the picture is no longer a pictogram but an ideogram, because it expresses some idea associated with the thing shown in the picture. Thus, in our system of traffic signs, a torch does not denote a literal torch, but the torch of learning, which by a further extension of meaning is (in this particular context) intended to indicate the presence of a school.

     Or we may extend the use of our pictograms in another direction. We may use the picture of the sun to denote not ‘sun’ but ‘son’; the picture of a bear to express not the animal but the verb ‘to bear’; the picture of a bee to express the verb ‘to be’. If we do that, we are concentrating on the sound instead of the sense; we use the signs now not as pictograms but as phonograms.

     But mark: pictograms and ideograms convey the same sense to readers whose languages may be widely different from each other, whereas phonograms are restricted to one particular language; for example, the use of the picture of the sun to denote the word ‘son’ is possible only with reference to a language in which the two words meaning respectively the chief heavenly luminary and one’s male offspring happen to have the same sound, as they have in English.

     We have a few well-known ideograms which are common to most nations today, the most obvious being the signs for numbers. If I write ‘four’, only a reader who understands English will know what I mean; but if I write 4, my meaning is understood at once by any Frenchman, German, Russian, Palestinian Jew or any other reader who may see it. They will pronounce it differently—quart, vier, tchetyre, arba, and so on—but they will all understand the same idea by it, because it expresses an idea and not any particular sound.

     I can go farther and build up words syllable by syllable, charade fashion, by the use of ideograms and phonograms. If I want to express ‘before’ in writing, I can use the picture of a bee followed by the ideogram 4.     If I wish to write ‘sonship’ I can combine the pictures of the sun and a ship. This may seem a fantastic procedure to us, but it is exactly the way in which writing developed. The representation of every syllable by a distinct sign is a real advance on the earlier stage in which ideograms and logograms (signs denoting whole words) were the only available symbols. The number of possible syllables in any language, though large, is limited; with a syllabary, therefore (a set of signs denoting syllables), we are on the way to a more convenient system of writing. The number of signs in a syllabary can be further reduced if, instead of having a separate sign for every possible syllable, we have signs for only the simpler syllables, say of the vowel-plus-consonant or consonant-plus-vowel type, or even of the consonant-plus-vowel type only. Thus, instead of writing a word like ‘Manchester’ with three syllabic signs, Manchester, one could use simpler signs and write it Ma-an-che-es-te-er, or even Ma-na-che-se-te-re. The last effort looks queer, but it is the way in which Greek was written for long in the island of Cyprus, where a syllabary of fifty-four signs was in use, indicating open syllables (syllables ending in a vowel) only. Thus in this Cypriote script a king called Stasikypros has his name written Sa-ta-si-ku-po-ro-se.

     In point of fact, it was seldom that one of these improvements was adopted in the ancient East to the complete exclusion of the earlier stages. Thus, in the cuneiform writing of the Euphrates Tigris valley and adjacent lands we find intermingled the simpler syllabic writing, the more complicated syllabic writing, and ideograms.

     This script is called cuneiform or wedge-shaped from the shape of the signs which was the natural result of the instrument and material used for writing it—a metal stylus with bevelled head which traced marks in soft clay, which was then baked hard. The cuneiform script was first used by the Sumerians, an early population of Mesopotamia, for writing their language. It goes back to c. 3000 B.C. Around that time we find two distinct forms of writing in Mesopotamia and Elam, which lay to the eastthe semi-pictographic script of Elam and Jemdet Nasr (near Kish), and the proto-cuneiform of Ur and Lagash. Both were probably derived from a common pictographic origin, but the Sumerians made a more rapid advance from it than the Elamites did. From the Sumerians the cuneiform script was taken over by other peoples for other languages—Elamite, Akkadian, Hurrian, Hittite, and others.

     There were other ideographic and syllabic scripts in use in the Middle East in the third and second millennia B.C.—the hieroglyphic script of Egypt, with the simpler systems derived from it; the hieroglyphic script used in the later Hittite kingdoms; the script printed †† on the Phaestus disc (which, though found in Crete, betrays an Anatolian origin); the varieties of linear script of Minoan Crete, which was carried thence to the Greek mainland and to Cyprus.

     [†† Yes, printed with movable stamps! According to Sir Arthur Evans, the inscription was a religious chant in honour of the Antolian Goddess-Mother. It shows forty-five different signs. See Evans, Scripta Minoa, (1909), pp. 22 ff., 273 ff.; D. Diringer, The Alphabet (1947), pp. 78 f.]

     [The Cretan linear script, which also goes back to a pictographic stage, remains undeciphered. When Sir A. Evans published Vol. I of his Scripta Minoa, in 1909, giving facsimiles of the inscriptions, he looked forward to their decipherment and translation in Vol. II; but Vol. II has never appeared. A recent attempt by the Czech Professor B. Hrozny to decipher the script has proved unconvincing. Yet the clue to the decipherment should now be within reach. In 1939 C. W. Blegen found about 600 tablets, written in a variation of Cretan linear script, on the site of Nestor’s city of Pylos in southwest Greece. The script seems to have been used for various languages, including Mycenean Greek. When the tablets have been published and studied (as they would have been by now but for the war), it should not take long to decipher those which used the script for a form of the Greek language. It was from the Cretan linear script that the Cypriote syllabary mentioned above was derived.

     While these syllabaries were in official use in the great Middle East Empires of the second millennium B.C., the first experiments were being made in alphabetic writing. The Egyptian scribes, as

early as 3000 B.C., began to develop out of their hieroglyphic writing a sort of alphabet of twenty-four signs, representing all the consonants current in their language. These signs were in their origin the signs for roots which consisted of one strong consonant and one or two weak consonants which tended to be disregarded or dropped. The signs thus came in each case to designate the surviving strong consonant. They were only a potential alphabet, however; apart from serving to spell foreign words and to fulfill some grammatical functions, they were not generally used. This potential alphabet never became a real alphabet; it never became independent of the cumbersome hieroglyphic system but merely supplemented it where some such supplementary aid was required.

     Yet it is commonly thought that the Egyptian potential alphabet gave the idea of a real alphabet to some of the Semitic peoples inhabiting the parts of Asia nearest to Egypt. This is not proved, but Egyptian derivation is less unlikely than derivation from any other source. We must remember, however, that it is not necessary to suppose that the alphabet must have evolved step by step from an earlier system of writing. The alphabetic idea, so simple once it has been suggested and worked out in practice, is the sort of idea that very possibly originated as a brain-wave in the creative mind of some inventive genius. ‘For this achievement,’ says Dr. Diringer, ‘simple as it now seems to us, the inventor, or the inventors are to be ranked among the greatest benefactors of mankind…. The more or less civilized peoples of Egypt, Mesopotaomia, Crete, Asia Minor, Indus Valley, China, Central America, reached an advanced stage in the history of writing, but could not get beyond the transitional stage. A few peoples (the ancient Cypriotes, the Japanese, and others) developed a syllabary. But only the Syro-Palestinian Semites produced a genius who created the alphabetic writing, from which have descended all past and present alphabets’. [The Alphabet, pp. 216 f.]

     One point in favour of the Egyptian derivation of the North Semitic alphabet is that it lacks vowel signs. True, the Semitic languages are of such a nature that their written forms can dispense with vowel signs less inconveniently than many other languages; yet it is probably not a coincidence that the Egyptian potential alphabet was also vowelless. Other points of contact between Egyptian writing and the North Semitic alphabet are affinity in writing materials (though this is by itself quite inconclusive), and similarity in the form and direction of the characters.

     If we wish to trace a closer connection between the Egyptian potential alphabet and the North Semitic alphabet, however, we must look for a missing link; the gap between the two is too wide for us to believe that the latter was an immediate development from the former. It has been argued in a very persuasive manner that the missing link is to be found in the script found in the Sinai Peninsula, at Serabit el-Khadem, where turquoise mines were worked on behalf of the Egyptians in the earlier part of the second millennium B.C. These Sinai inscriptions were discovered by flinders Petrie in 1905, and are now in the Cairo Museum. Sir Alan Gardiner, who was a pioneer in the decipherment of these inscriptions, assigned them to the period of the Twelfth Egyptian Dynasty (c. 1989-1776 B.C.), and concluded that this script was the origin of the North Semitic alphabet, largely on the ground that the names of the North Semitic letters designate the objects depicted by the Sinaitic symbols. A corollary of this is the view that each symbol indicates the initial sound of the name of the object which it depicts; for example, the North Semitic letter beth, which originally was the picture of a house and whose name means ‘house’, is the symbol for the sound b. This is what is called the acrophonic principle. It is difficult to account for all the letters of the original alphabet on this principle, but it does seem to have played a prominent part in the formation of the alphabet.

     But the view that the Phoenician alphabet is descended from the Sinaitic script is likely to be modified or even given up as a result of Professor W. F. Albright's study of the Sinai inscriptions in the winter of 1947-8. Professor Albright now holds that the date of the inscriptions must be reduced by three or four centuries from the date assigned them by Sir Alan Gardiner, and considers the script ‘as normal alphabetic Canaanite from the early fifteenth century B.C.’

     [Professor Albright’s account is given in the Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, April, 1948, pp. 6-22. His dating marks a return to that suggested by Flinders Petrie, Researches in Sinai (1906), pp. 129-131.]

     In that case it is later than our earliest evidence for the North Semitic alphabet, and it looks as if the Sinai script and the North Semitic alphabet had a common ancestor. If we look for this common ancestor, we are confronted with the fact that in the period with which we are dealing Syria and Palestine formed the arena of a considerable number of competing experiments in alphabetic writing. The exact circumstances in which the alphabet originated, and the nature and extent of its dependence on an Egyptian prototype cannot be determined in our present state of knowledge.

     The excavations at Tell ed-Duweir (identified with the Biblical Lachish), begun in 1933, provided further examples of early alphabetic writing, including an inscription on a dagger of the sixteenth century B.C., and four pieces of pottery of the thirteenth century B.C. bearing marks ‘which are unmistakably the letters of an alphabet’. [G. R. Driver, Semitic Writing, p. 101.]

     Comparable inscriptions have been found on various objects at Gezer, Shechem, Megiddo, Beth-shemesh and elsewhere. These early Canaanite inscriptions fall into three groups, concerning which Dr. Diringer remarks: ‘For those readers who have a fondness for curious facts, I should like to point out that, probably by a sheer coincidence, the three groups of the early Canaanite inscriptions correspond roughly, the first to the Age of the Patriarchs; the second, to the Age of Joshua; the third, to the Age of the Judges; and that the lacuna of two or three centuries between the first and the second groups corresponds roughly to the period of oppression of the Israelites in Egypt’. [The Alphabet, p. 211.]

     There was one early form of alphabet used in the North Semitic area which did to a limited degree express vowel distinctions. This was the cuneiform alphabet of Ras Shamra (the ancient Ugarit), used for the texts discovered there from 1929 onwards and dating from c. 14.00 B.C. This cuneiform alphabet is not a development from the cuneiform script of Mesopotamia; its wedge-shaped character is the result of writing with a metal stylus on clay tablets. It was, probably enough, invented by a native of Ugarit or the neighbourhood who knew the North Semitic alphabet, and on the basis of that made up an alphabet suitable for the writing materials with which he and his fellows were familiar. Some, but only some, of the Ras Shamra characters appear to be copies of the corresponding characters of the North Semitic alphabet, adapted to the different writing material; others may have simply been invented on principles of general convenience.

     The form of the letters is a very unimportant matter compared with the basic alphabetic principle. The Ras Shamra alphabet is so well advanced at the date of the inscriptions in which we know it that it can hardly have originated later than the sixteenth century B. C., ††† and the alphabet on which it was based must be still older.

     [††† C. F. A. Schaeffer, The Cuneiform Texts of Ras Shamra-Ugarit, p. 36. More recently, in November 1949, Professor Schaeffer found at Ras Shamra a tablet of the fourteenth century B.C., on which are inscribed thirty letters of the Ras Shamra alphabet in what was presumably their alphabetic order. The Ras Shamra letters listed on p. 31 appear on this tablet in the following order: Nos. 1, 4, 5, 12, 6, 8, 9, 10,11, 13, 14, 15, 28, 16, 17, 30, 18, 25, 19, 21, 23, 24, 26, 27, 29, 22, 31, 2, 3, 20. The close approximation of this order to the known order of the Phoenician or North Semitic alphabet further supports the view expressed above that the Ras Shamra alphabet is based on that alphabet. A full account of the new discovery was given in the Manchester Guardian of March 4, 1950.]

     This agrees with the evidence we have already noted for tracing the North Semitic alphabet back to the eighteenth century. Instead of having but one letter corresponding to ᾿aleph, the first letter of the North Semitic alphabet, the Ras Shamra alphabet has three, according as the guttural sound ᾿aleph (something like what we know as the `glottal stop') was followed by an a, i, or u vowel sound. It has been suggested that this departure from general Semitic practice where the alphabet is concerned may have been due to requirements of non-Semitic languages for which the Ras Shamra alphabet was also used. [See C. H. Gordon, Ugaritic Handbook (1947), pp. 10 ff.] The Ras Shamra alphabet has some thirty letters; this excess over the number in the North Semitic alphabet is accounted for in part by the three letters corresponding to ᾿aleph and in part by its making provision for a greater complement of guttural and sibilant sounds than the North Semitic alphabet—these sounds having been amalgamated with related ones in later North Semitic speech but kept distinct to this day in Arabic. It is to be expected that if we found earlier monuments of the North Semitic alphabet we should find these sounds represented. Professor Albright has identified letters representing some of them in the Sinai script, [Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, April 1948.] which seems to be derived from an earlier form of the North Semitic alphabet than we know yet.

     So we have not come quite to the end of our quest; more light must yet be thrown on the origin of the alphabet. When that light is sufficient to show exactly where the alphabet came into being, it will not be surprising if it turns out that Gebal was the place. Gebal was in close touch with Egypt; at Gebal, too, there was in use a system of writing ‘lying midway between the Egyptian hieroglyphic script and the Phoenician alphabet’ [G. R. Driver, Semitic Writing, p. 93.] which has been deciphered recently and which may prove to be the missing link. More than this we cannot say.

     What has all this to do with Biblical studies? Much every way. These researches incidentally increase our knowledge of the milieu in which the ancestors of Israel lived. What Professor Albright says of the Sinai inscriptions may be extended to most of the subject-matter which we have been discussing: ‘The discovery of more inscriptions in Serābt will thus have considerable importance for Israelite origins as well as for the history of the alphabet’. [Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, April, 1948, p. 22.] Again, in view of the classic Protestant belief that the Scriptures should be made available to the common people in their own language, it is worth noticing that it was the alphabet that made it possible for all classes to be literate; its invention is therefore a landmark of great importance in the history of civilization. The older systems of writing, being much more complicated, required long study and practice and were the preserve of priestly and clerkly castes.

     But once the alphabet was invented, it was a simple matter for anyone to learn to read and write. In judges 8. 14 we read how Gideon laid hands on a young man of Succoth in Transjordan, who, according to the text of the Authorized and Revised Versions, ‘described’ to him the chief men of his city. The margins of both versions, however, point out that the ordinary sense of the word is ‘wrote’. But that a chance youth should have been able to write at this time may have seemed too unlikely. When the Revised Version was produced, the oldest alphabetic autograph known was Mesha’s Moabite Stone, three centuries later than Gideon’s time. Now, however, it seems most reasonable to take the narrative literally and conclude that the youth wrote down for Gideon a list of the elders of Succoth.

     As we have seen, Moses is the first person in the Bible who is said to have written anything, and what he wrote has formed part ever since of ‘God’s word written. It is clear that Moses could perfectly well have written in an alphabetic script, and it is most likely that he did so. In days when alphabetic writing at so early a period was not known, it was reasonable to suggest, as Professor Naville [E. Naville, Archology of the Old Testament (1913), p. 4.] and Colonel Conder [C. R. Conder, The Bible and the East (1896), pp. 63 ff.] did, that Moses wrote in the cuneiform script on clay tablets like those discovered at Tell el-Amarna in Egypt. But now there is no ground for thinking that the Bible was not written from the very beginning in an alphabetic script. The history of the Bible is thus closely bound up from the start with the history of alphabetic writing. Believers in the providence of God may well conclude that it was by that providence that, when the Bible first began to be written, there lay ready to hand for the purpose a form of writing, recently invented, the understanding of which was not restricted to specially trained readers but lay within the capacity of Everyman.

Chapter 3—The Hebrew Language

     Our discussion of the script which was used in writing the Scriptures leads us on inevitably to some consideration of the languages which were written in those scripts.

     The languages of the Bible are not, as is sometimes imagined, dead languages. All three of them are alive and in use today. Hebrew is the official language of the young State of Israel, and during the period of the British Mandate it was one of the three official languages of Palestine, Arabic and English being the other two. Aramaic is spoken by the small remnant of Assyrian Christians in Syria, Irak and Persia. Greek is the language of between seven and eight million Greeks. There are naturally differences between the modern forms of these languages and the forms spoken in Biblical times. Change is necessary to life on earth. Only when a language becomes dead does it cease to change. In that sense classical Latin is a dead language.

     [Ordinary spoken Latin, on the other hand, did not die; it continued to be spoken, and gradually changed into the modern Romance languages: French, Spanish, Catalan, Portuguese, Provenҫal, Italian, Romansch, Romanian, etc.]

     But there is much less difference between modern Hebrew and Biblical Hebrew, between modern Greek and Biblical Greek, than there is between modern English and English as spoken in 1066.

     By far the greater part of the Old Testament is written in Hebrew. The language is not called ‘Hebrew’ in the Old Testament itself, however. There it is variously called ‘the Jews’ tongue’ (Isa. 36. II; Neh. 13. 24) and ‘the lip of Canaan’ (Isa. 19. 18). In the New Testament it is called ‘Hebrew’ in Rev. 9. 11; 16. 16. [Where the ‘Hebrews’ language is mentioned elsewhere in the New Testament, the Aramaic language is meant.]'

     Hebrew belongs to what is called the Semitic family of languages. This name ‘Semitic’ is now so firmly established in this sense that it is not worth changing it, although it is not an ideal term for the purpose. (But while it is convenient and fairly unobjectionable to use it in a linguistic sense, it is misleading and invidious to use it in a racial sense.) It is an adjective derived from the name of Shem, one of the three sons of Noah, from whom several Semitic-speaking groups are derived in Gen. 10 and 11.

     [E.g., the Hebrews, Assyrians, Aramans, and Arabs. But Elam and Lud, other sons of Shem (Gen. 10. 22), were not Semitic-speaking. On the other hand, some of the children of Ham were Semitic-speaking, e.g., Canaan (Gen. 10. 6) and those sons of Cush who are listed in Gen. 10. 7. The genealogical tables of Gen. 10 and 11 do not denote linguistic divisions but geographical and political relationships.]

      When we speak of languages as belonging to one family of languages (in this instance the Semitic family), we mean that these languages have developed from what were dialects of one original language. As the people who spoke that language spread out from a common centre, they and their descendants deviated increasingly from each other in their speech, owing to a variety of factors, until what at an earlier stage were mutually intelligible dialects became distinct languages. The geographical factor was one of the most potent in producing this diversity of speech, and so it is natural to group the languages of the family in a geographical arrangement. Hebrew belongs to the Northwest Semitic group, more particularly to the Western division of the group which included Canaanite, Moabite and Phoenician, the Semitic languages with which Hebrew was most closely akin. To the Northern division belonged Amorite and Aramaic. The language of the Ras Shamra texts, discovered in North Syria in 1929 and following years, has generally been classified as a Canaanite language, but it has some affinities with other branches of the Semitic family as well, and perhaps should simply be called Northwest Semitic. The East Semitic group comprises the Semitic languages of Babylonia and Assyria, generally referred to comprehensively as Akkadian. The South Semitic languages are those of Arabia and Ethiopia.     Since the seventh century A.D. the Arabic language has spread west and east from its Arabian home; it is by far the most widely spoken Semitic language nowadays.

     This geographical classification is only a matter of expediency, however; it must not be thought of as rigid or scientific. For example, although Hebrew is classified among West Semitic languages, it has various features which are rather distinctive of Akkadian, Arabic, and even Egyptian. These features have led some scholars to make such exaggerated statements as Professor Margoliouth made in the beginning of the present century when he wrote that ‘it is now possible to treat the Old Testament as a part of Arabic literature, just as it has long been possible to treat Hebrew as a dialect of Arabic’. [D. S. Margoliouth, Lines of Defence of the Biblical Revelation (1903), p. v.] Another learned Orientalist is quoted as having said that a good Arabic dictionary is of greater use for the understanding of the Old Testament than all possible commentaries.

     [This Orientalist is quoted but not named by B. Manassewitsch in Die Arabische Sprache (1891), p.v. Much of the importance of Arabic in this respect lies in its wealth of vocabulary and its      More recently, Dr. A. S. Yahuda has overstated the case for Egyptian linguistic influence on Biblical Hebrew in a manner which has secured the general assent neither of Semitists nor of Egyptologists.

     [Principally in his book, The Languages of the Pentateuch in its Relation to Egyptian (1933). Egyptian is not a Semitic but a Hamitic language, but the Semitic and Hamitic families are so closely related that many scholars envisage a primitive Hamito-Semitic speech-unity.]

     And other scholars have looked in other directions for the main affinities of the Hebrew language. Such conclusions are really the result of concentrating on the connections which Hebrew has with one language-group or another; they have all a greater or lesser degree of truth, and are valuable in so far as they remind us that the classification of the Semitic languages—or of any other family of languages—is no simple matter.

     Hebrew was no isolated language in Old Testament times. It was exactly what Isaiah calls it—the ‘language (literally, ‘lip’ of Canaan’. It had only dialect-variations from Phoenician, the language of Tyre, Sidon, and Begal and of other colonies farther afield, like Carthage; or from the language spoken by the Moabites, who lived east of the Dead Sea. In the days of the Roman wars with Carthage (third century B.C.) the chief magistrates of Carthage were called by practically the same title as the judges of Old Testament times. The judges were called shōphĕtīm in Hebrew; the Romans replaced the Semitic plural ending by a Latin ending (-es) and called the Carthaginian magistrates suffetes. The names of many Carthaginians are easily intelligible to anyone with a knowledge of Hebrew. Thus Hannibal, the great Carthaginian general, ahs a name which means ‘grace of Baal’; compare the Old Testament name Hanniel (Num. 34. 23; 1 Chron. 7. 39), which means ‘grace of God’ (᾿Ēl)’ or ‘God is gracious’. His father, Hamilcar, was given the surname Barca (‘lightning’) which is identical with the name of the Hebrew judge, Barak. The name Hamilcar itself is not so obviously interpreted; it is actually a rather broken-down form of “Abd-Melqart, ‘servant of Melkart’, a leading deity of Phoenicia. It was Melkart who was worshipped in Israel as Baal (lord) in the time of Ahab and Jezebel, for Jezebel was a Phoenician princess. Melkart is actually Mel-quart, ‘king of the city’; melk being the equivalent of Hebrew melekh, ‘king’, and qart being a Phoenician word meaning ‘town’, the same word as Hebrew qiryath which occurs as an element in some Hebrew place-names.

     [As in Kiriath-sepher (‘city of books’); other forms of the same word found in Old Testament Hebrew are qereth and qir.]

     Phoenician qaret appears in the very name of Carthage, which is Phoenician Qart-chadast (New Town); the second element in the name is the feminine form of the adjective meaning ‘new’ (Heb. chādāsh, feminine chādāshāh).

     Older documents in the Phoenician language are those inscriptions mentioned on pages 21 f. The inscription on the sarcophagus of King Ahiram ‡ of Gebal, for example, is written in a language almost identical with Hebrew.

     [‡ ᾿Achi-ram, meaning ‘brother of the High One, or ‘the High One is brother.’ The name of Hiram, king of Tyre is a shortened form of Achiram.]

     Its translation runs: ‘Ittobaal (Ethbaal), son of Ahiram, king of Gebal, made this coffin for Ahiram his father as an abode for ever. And if any king among kings or governor among governors pitches a camp against Gebal and uncovers this coffin, let the sceptre of his authority be broken and the throne of his kingdom be overthrown, but let peace rule over Gebal. Whoso effaces this writing, let his seed perish’.

     The Tell el-Amarna tablets, which contain the diplomatic correspondence of the Egyptian court during the reign of the Pharaoh Akhnaton (1377-1360 B.C.), are written mostly in the Akkadian tongue, but contain here and there Canaanite glosses in cuneiform script.

     The first really long inscription in any Canaanite language, however, which has survived, is the Moabite Stone of King Mesha, [See p. 22.] bearing an inscription of date about 850 B.C. Here again we find a language substantially the same as Hebrew; the inscription presents no difficulty to any reader with an adequate knowledge of Hebrew.

     Among the Israelites themselves there were no doubt dialect variations in their use of Hebrew, but unfortunately we have no inscriptions from the northern kingdom comparable to those from the southern kingdom, which might enable us to know what these variations were. From the northern kingdom we have the Gezer calendar (see page 22) and a number of short inscriptions on pieces of pottery (ostraca), the most important of these being seventy-five ostraca from the royalpalace in Samaria, belonging to the reign of Jeroboam II (785-745 B.C.), and containing notes on supplies of oil and wine. But from the southern kingdom we have more continuous inscriptions—we have the six lines of the inscription from near the exit of the Siloam tunnel, [This tunnel carries water from the Virgin’s Fountain to the Pool of Siloam. The construction of the tunnel is usually connected with Hezekiah’s operation mentioned in 2 Kings 20. 20; 2 Chron. 32. 3 f., 30. The inscription is now in Istanbul.] describing how the workmen, tunneling from either end, struck pick against pick (c. 700 B.C.); and above on hundred lines of readable Hebrew in the Lachish Letters, [These letters were written on ostraca during Nebuchadnezzar’s siege of Lachish (Jer. 34. 7.) discovered in 1935 and 1938, and written in the summer of 589 B.C.

     These have proved very important for many aspects of Hebrew and Old Testament study. Of the first discussion to be published of the Lachish Letters (that contributed by Professor H. Torczyner to the Bialik memorial volume in 1935), Professor D. Winton Thomas remarks: ‘It is of some interest that this first discussion of them was written, two thousand five hundred years later than the period to which the ostraca belong, in the language of the ostraca themselves, in Hebrew’. [‘The Prophet’ in the Lachish Ostraca (1946), pp. 5 f.]

     After the Jews’ return from the Babylonian captivity, the use of Hebrew as a spoken language declined; for vernacular purposes it was increasingly superseded by Aramaic. Hebrew, however, remained the sacred language; it was used for long by the Rabbis in their discussions, and as a literary medium it never fell into complete disuse. Some scholars have contended that even as late as the time of Christ Hebrew was the vernacular of Judaea, as does Professor M. H. Segal, although he concedes that ‘with regard to the language of Jesus, it is admitted that in the Roman period, and perhaps earlier, Aramaic was the vernacular of the native Galilean Jews’. [Misshnaic Hebrew Grammar (1927), p. 17.] Professor T. W. Manson has suggested that in His more formal disputations with the Pharisees, Jesus may have used Hebrew, as they did. [The Teaching of Jesus (19310, pp. 46 ff.] This Rabbinical Hebrew (which represents a later development of Biblical Hebrew) was the language of the Mishnah, a codification of the traditional oral law which was committed to writing about A.D. 200.

     [Further commentaries grew up around the Mishnah in Babylonia and Palestine. These commentaries are known as Gemaras. The Mishnah with Palestinian Gemara is called the Palestinian or Jerusalem Talmud; the Mishnah with Babylonian Gemara is called the Babylonian Talmud. The Palestinian Talmud was committed to writing c. A.D. 400; the Babylonian Talmud c. A.D. 500. The latter is fuller and generally regarded as the more authoritative. Another collection of tradition parallel to the Mishnah but independent of it is the Tosephta. Mishnah and Tosephta are in Hebrew; the Germaras mainly in Aramaic.]

     For this reason it is commonly known as Mishnaic Hebrew.

     The use of Hebrew as a literary language continued into the Middle Ages. The history of modern Hebrew literature goes back to the period of the Enlightenment in the eighteenth century, [See J. Klausner, History of Modern Hebrew Literature (1932).] and more recently the ancient language has renewed its youth like the eagle and become the vigorous vernacular of Palestinian Jewry.

     The ancestors of the Israelites apparently spoke Aramaic; that at any rate, is the language which was spoken in Paddan-Aram by the relatives whom the patriarchs left behind them there. [See p. 47.] By the time of Jacob, however, the branch of the family that had settled in Canaan spoke in the ‘lip of Canaan’. This may be deduced from the statement that when Jacob and Laban piled a cairn in Transjordan to demarcate their respective spheres, Jacob called it by a Hebrew name, while Laban gave it the corresponding Aramaic name. [Gen. 31. 47.]

     From the foregoing chapter it will be seen that the Hebrews wrote their language in the standard North Semitic alphabet of twenty-two letters, running from right to left. This direction has been maintained in Hebrew writing ever since, and while beginners in Hebrew study may find it strange at first, it is something to which they soon become used. Until about 200 B.C. they used the form of the letters which we find in the Phoenician inscriptions—a form in which the letters have an angular shape. [For various forms of the Semitic alphabet see table on p. 31.] This is the form in which the earlier Hebrew documents are written—the Siloam inscription, the Lachish Letters, and so forth, not to mention the Moabite Stone and other inscriptions in other varieties of Canaanite. The script in which the Samaritan manuscripts and their printed copies are written is an ornamental development of this angular script. Among the Aramaic speakers, however, another variety of the Semitic alphabet was developed, in which the letters acquired a square shape rather than an angular one, and this square character was taken over by the Jews for the writing of Hebrew as well as Aramaic about 200 B.C. It is in this square character that manuscripts of the Hebrew Bible are written; it is this, too, which is used for Hebrew printing. Jewish tradition ascribes the change-over in the script to Ezra, but it is probably later than his day.

     The names of the twenty-two Hebrew letters are familiar to the reader of the English Bible from Psalm 119, in which each section of eight verses is named after a Hebrew letter. This is because the Psalm, consisting of twenty-two sections of eight verses each, is an acrostic Psalm in Hebrew. Each of the first eight verses begins with the letter א (᾿aleph), the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet; each of the second eight verses begins with ב (beth), the second letter, and so on. There are other acrostic compositions in the Pslams and elsewhere in the Old Testament, though Psalm 119 is the most elaborate. The first four chapters of Lamentations are acrostic chapters; chapters 1, 2, and 4 have twenty-two verses each, each verse beginning with a different letter of the Hebrew alphabet, in the proper order; chapter 3, with sixty-six verses, has the first three verses beginning with א (᾿aleph) , the second three beginning with ב (beth), and so on.     (Chapter 5 has also twenty-two verses, but it is not an acrostic.)

     All twenty-two letters of the Hebrew alphabet represents consonants, though some of these are unknown in our language. Hebrew, like other Semitic languages, was rich in gutturals, though

not so rich as Arabic. The Hebrew gutturals were א (᾿aleph), ה (he), ח (cheth), צ (‘ayin), and ך (resh). ᾿Aleph denoted what phoneticians call the glottal stop, a momentary closing of the air passage before a vowel or between two vowels. It is not represented by any sign in ordinary written English, but its presence can be detected if we pronounce the phrase `at all' with a momentary break between ‘at’ and ‘all’, instead of saying, as we do, ‘a-tall’. The glottal stop is also heard in some of our dialects as a substitute for the ‘t’ sound. When Hebrew is transcribed into our alphabet, ᾿aleph is commonly indicated by the sign ᾿. Ayin was a similar sound, but the closure of the air passage takes place farther back in the throat and is accompanied by vibration of the vocal chords. There is no need to attempt this sound, however, as modern Hebrew speakers ignore it in pronunciation. It is still pronounced in Arabic.     In transcription it is denoted by the sign ‘. He is an ordinary ‘h’ sound; cheth is more vigorously aspirated, like the ‘ch’ sound of Scots, Welsh, or German.     The latter sound is indicated in transcription by ch (as in this book) or by h with a dot below it. Resh, the ‘r’ sound, was also treated as a guttural by the Hebrews, so we conclude that it was produced at the back of the mouth, somewhat like a Northumbrian ‘r’.

     The letters ב (beth), ג (gimel), ך (daleth), כ (kaph), פ (pe), ת (tau) form a special group of six. They ordinarily represent the sounds b, g, d, k, p, t; but when preceded by a vowel they were pronounced as ‘spirants’ instead of ‘stops’, and in that case are sometimes transcribed by bh, gh, dh, kh, ph, th. These transcriptions represent respectively the sounds of English v; g in German sagen; th as in English ‘then’ ch as in Scottish ‘loch’; ph like f and th as in English ‘thin’.

     In point of fact, however, the guttural distinctions and the double pronunciation of the letters b, g, d, k, p, t, were not in antiquity and are not today so closely observed as the grammarians might lead one to suppose. In the standard pronunciation of modern Palestinian Hebrew only three of these last six letters have their double pronunciation preserved: b, k, and p.

     There are two ‘t’ sounds—ת (tau), transliterated t, and ט (teth), normally transliterated t with a dot below it. [In this work no distinction is made in transliteration between tau and teth, for typographical convenience.] There are two ‘k’ sounds—כ (kaph), transliterated k, and ק (qoph), transliterated q (as in this book) or k with a dot below it. No distinction in pronunciation is maintained between tau and teth or between kaph and qoph, although these distinctions are still made in Arabic. ן (waw) is pronounced w, י (yod) is pronounced y, ‡‡ ל (lamed) is pronounced l; מ (mem) is pronounced m; נ (nun) is pronounced n.

     [‡‡ In the English Bible, Hebrew proper names with yod are represented with j, which in modern English has quite a different sound from y. Thus ‘Jeohovah-jireh’ would have been pronounced in Hebrew something like Yahweh yeereh. In the square Hebrew alphabet י (yod) was the smallest letter; hence the Gospel expression ‘jot and tittle’ to denote ‘minuti.’ The tittle was a small ornament added to a letter.]

     That leaves only the sibilants or hissing sounds, of which there are five. ז (zayin) is z; ס (samekh) is s. #fb2a; (shin) was usually pronounced sh, but sometimes had a sound almost identical with that of samekh. In that case the letter was called sin instead of shin. To distinguish the two pronunciations of ש, the Palestinian Masoretes [See pp. 114 ff.] placed a dot over the right prong for the sound sh (t) and one over the left prong for the sound s (#fb2b;). Another sibilant was denoted by the letter צ (tsade); this was, perhaps, more sharply hissed, with the tongue in a different position than that required for the pronunciation of samekh. It is transcribed ts (as in this book) and also by or by s with a dot below it; the ts pronunciation is that adopted by the Jews of Northern Europe and, although it is not an ancient pronunciation, it is convenient to use it in practice to distinguish this sound from other sibilants.

     Even in ancient times there were dialect variations in the use of sibilants, as the Shibboleth- Sibboleth incident of judges 12. 6 makes clear. [Heb. shibbōleth means an ear of corn or a stream.]

     At a later date the Galileans had the reputation of confusing or dropping their gutturals, and it may have been some provincialism of this sort that made Peter’s speech ‘bewray’ him in the courtyard of the high priest’s palace.

     The letters כ (kaph), מ (mem), נ (nun), פ (pe) and צ (tsade) had special forms for use when they came at the end of words: these were respectively ך,ם, ן, ף and ץ.

     The similarity between certain letters of the Hebrew alphabet is frequently responsible for scribal errors. The letters ד (daleth) and ך (resh) are particularly liable to be confused. For example,

the son of Javan (Greece) who is called Dodanim in Gen. 10. 4 is called Rodanim in 1 Chron. 1. 7 (R.V.). The true form is Rodanim, which denotes the inhabitants of the island of Rhodes, but the initial ך became corrupted to ד in the textual transmission of Genesis. For the same reason there is frequent confusion between the two nations Aram (Syria) and Edom in the Old Testament. Thus, when we read in 2 Sam. 8. 13 of David ‘smiting the Syrians (Heb. ᾿Aram) in the valley of salt’, a comparison of 1 Chron. 18. 12 and the title of Psalm 60 shows that the true reading is ᾿Edōm (the difference was that betweenan אךםand אדם.

     As the Hebrew letters denoted consonants only, vowels were unrepresented in writing. People who knew the language could read it easily without any signs denoting vowels. Even today

people who are really familiar with Hebrew can read it easily in the consonantal text alone; some say they can read it more easily this way, as the vowel-signs hold them up in the course of reading. A glance at a modern Hebrew newspaper will show that it is printed without vowel-signs, but those readers for whom it is intended have no difficulty in reading it. The vowel-signs, however, provide a very welcome crutch to less competent readers.

     We can trace various stages in the representation of vowels in Hebrew writing. The first stage was introduced apparently some time before the Christian era. It was designed to represent the more important long vowels, and for this purpose four of the consonant letters were used with a secondary function. To represent long a, ה (he) or א (᾿aleph) was used; to represent long o or u, ן (waw); to represent long e or i, י (yod).

     This was very inadequate as a method of vowel-representation, however, and in the early centuries A.D. further methods were devised. Some accurate system was necessary to guide the public readers of the Scriptures in the synagogues, for in an age when Hebrew was not much used as a language of ordinary intercourse the exact pronunciation might be forgotten. The vowel-signs (or vowel-points, as they are usually called) which were finally established as standard about A.D. 900 superseded earlier schemes, of which some evidence survives in old manuscripts. The victorious scheme was the work of the Masoretes of Tiberias in Palestine, and represents the pronunciation of Hebrew vowels current in Palestine from the end of the eighth century A.D. onwards.

     [See pp. 114 ff. The antiquity and authority of the Hebrew vowel-points was a subject of much debate for some two centuries after the Reformation: see Dr. John Bowman’s article, ‘A Forgotten Controversy,’ in The Evangelical Quarterly for January, 1948.]

     These vowel-points were added to the consonantal text in much the same way as the vowel-signs are indicated in Pitman’s shorthand. If we look at a page of the Hebrew Bible we see above and below the line of consonants (and sometimes halfway up) a series of dots and dashes. Most of these are the Masoretic vowel-points, while others are further aids to the pronunciation and punctuation.

     We can best illustrate the vowel-points by placing each between two consonants to show their positions; for this purpose we may choose the consonants ה (h) and ס (s), without considering whether the resultant syllables have any sense or not.

     has           would be written     -      -     ס __

     hās *          would be written     -      -     ס __

     hes          would be written     -      -     ס __

     hēs          would be written     -     -     ס __

     his          would be written      -      -     ס __

     hos *          would be written      -      -     ס __

     hōs          would be written     -     -     ס __

     hus          would be written     -     -     ס __

     [*Note that ā is represented by the same sign as o. This shows that at the time when this system of vowel-points was fixed there was no distinction in quality between these two vowels. There was such a distinction in Palestine before about A.D. 750, and that distinction was maintained in Babylonia, from which the pronunciation used by Sephardic Jews (those of Spain and Portugal) was derived. The pronunciation of the Palestinian Masoretes, which did not distinguish ā from o, influenced the pronunciation o Ashkenazic Jews (those of North Europe). Thus the Ashkenazim, for example, pronounce ם___ (‘there’) as shom; the Sephardim pronounce it as shām. The standard pronunciation of modern Palestinian Hebrew approximates to the Sephardic rather than to the Ashkenazic.]

     But what happened when certain vowels had already been denoted by consonants? By the Masoretic period these consonants had become fixed as part of the inviolable consonantal text. They were therefore left in undisturbed possession, and the newer and more comprehensive system was superimposed upon them.

     Hebrew grammar is simple and logical, but it seems difficult at first because it is so different from the grammar of those languages with which we are familiar in Western Europe.

     Most Hebrew words are derived from roots containing three letters.     Take, for example, the root #fb2a; ד ק q-d-sh, which denotes the idea of holiness. From this root a number of different forms

can be composed, by means of various vowels, prefixes and suffixes, or such devices as the doubling of the middle letter. Thus we have qōdesh, ‘holiness’; qādōsh, ‘holy’; qodshō, ‘his holiness’; qādēsh, ‘a sanctuary’ (as in place-names like Kadesh-Barnea, Kadesh-Naphtali); qĕdeshīm and qĕdēshōth, the male and female attendants at Canaanite sanctuaries whose functions involved sexual vice.     From the same root we have verb forms; qādash, ‘he was holy’; qaddēsh or haqdēsh, ‘to make holy’, ‘to sanctify’; mĕqaddesh or maqdīsh, ‘sanctifying’; mithqaddēsh, ‘sanctifying oneself’;᾿eqdash, ‘I will be holy,’ and so forth.

     From the adjective qādōsh, ** which is masculine singular, we can form the feminine singular qĕdōshāh, the masculine plural qĕdōshīm, and the feminine plural qĕdōshōth. From this it will be seen that –āh *** is the characteristic feminine singular ending, and that the plural endings -īm and –ōth are characteristic of the masculine and feminine respectively. There are exceptions to every rule, however, as will be appreciated when it is considered that the distinctively masculine word ‘father’ has its plural in -ōth (᾿ābhōth), while the essentially feminine word ‘woman’ has its plural in -īm (nāshīm)!

     [* The adajectival sense may also be expressed by using the abstract noun qōdesh, holiness’; thus har qōdesh ‘hill of holiness,’ means ‘holy hill’; har qodshī, literally ‘hill of my holiness,’ means ‘my holy hill’; rūach quodsō, literally ‘spirit of his holiness,’ means ‘his holy spirit,’ and so on.]

     [** This –āh was previously –āth, which is preserved in the construct state. So we have feminine tōrāh, ‘law,’ but tōrath ᾿Elōhīm, ‘law of God.’]

     [*** Nāshīm is the irregular plural of ᾿ishshāh, ‘woman.’ ᾿Īsh, ‘man,’ has its plural ᾿ănāshīm. The other common word for ‘man’, ᾿ādām, has no formal plural; one either uses the singular ᾿ādām in a collective sense, or says bĕnē ᾿ ādām, ‘sons of man.’]

     In addition to the singular and plural numbers, Hebrew has also the dual number, which is used chiefly of persons or things which habitually go in pairs. The dual ends in -ayim. Thus from ᾿ōzen, ‘ear’, we have the dual ᾿oznayim, ‘ears’; from ayin, ‘eye, we have ēnayim, ‘eyes’; from sāphāh, ‘lip’, we have sĕphāhayim, ‘lips’. When one noun follows another so that the second bears a ‘genitive’ relationship to the preceding one, as in the phrase ‘man of God’ (Heb. ᾿īsh ᾿Elōhīm), Hebrew has no word corresponding to English ‘of’, and no change takes place in the second of the two nouns. The first noun, however, commonly assumes a shorter form. Thus ᾿Elōhīm is ‘God’, but ‘God of Israel’ is ᾿Elōhē Yisrā’ēl (see Gen. 33. 20, where ᾿El-elohe-Israel’ is ‘God, the God of Israel’). When two nouns occur in such a relationship as this, the former is said to be in the ‘construct state’; a noun in the construct state is never preceded by the definite article.

     The definite article in Hebrew is ha, which is attached to a following noun in accordance with certain rules which need not be detailed here. When a noun preceded by the article is accompanied by an attributive adjective, that adjective must also be preceded by the article. Thus ‘the great man’ would be hā- ᾿īsh ha-gādōl―literally, ‘the man the holy (one)’.

     Instead of using possessive pronouns, Hebrew attaches suffixes to the noun. Thus from ᾿īsh, ‘man’, we find ᾿īshī, ‘my man’; ᾿īshō, ‘his man’; ᾿īshēnu, ‘our man’, and so on.

     The verb in Biblical Hebrew does not have what can properly be called tenses, distinguishing past, present, and future time. It has instead what are technically called ‘aspects’, which distinguish the character of the action as being completed or incomplete. The two aspects are known as ‘perfective’ or ‘imperfective’.

     [If we call them perfect and imperfect, we are liable to confuse them with the perfect and imperfect tenses of other languages; such confusion is even more likely if we follow older textbooks and call them past and future. T. Newberry, in The Englishman’s Bible, calls them the short and long tenses, and marks them in the text by a dot and an upright stroke respectively. The perfective and imperfective aspects of the verb will be familiar to students of the Slav languages, where they play an important part alongside the ordinary tenses.     Even Biblical Hebrew preserves some vestiges of older Semitic tense-forms over and above the regular aspect-forms, notably in the ᾿waw consecutive’ construction, which is too technical a matter to deal with here. In Modern Hebrew the perfective and imperfective aspects have become the past and future tenses respectively, while the participle discharges the function of a present tense.]

     Then, in place of what we call ‘voices’, the Hebrew verb has a number of forms called ‘conjugations’ which express various forms of the verbal action. The normal conjugations are seven in number, though not every verb has all seven. The first is the qal or ‘light’ conjugation, which expresses the ordinary form of the verbal action. The second conjugation is the niph'al, which expresses firstly a ‘tolerative’ sense, secondly a reflexive or reciprocal sense, and thirdly a passive sense. The tolerative sense is well illustrated by the well-known words of Isa. 55. 6, which really mean: ‘Seek ye the Lord while He lets Himself be found’ (the form used being the niph'al of mātsā, ‘find’).     The third or piel conjugation has normally intensive force, and its distinctive feature is the doubling of the middle letter of the root. Thus the root sh-b-r, which in the qal means simply ‘break’, appears in the piel as shibbēr, ‘break in pieces’. A further sense which the piel may bear is the causative one; from the root 1-m-d, which in the qal means `learn', we have the pi'el form limmad, ‘cause to learn’, i.e. ‘teach’. The more usual form by which causative meaning is expressed, however, is the hiphil conjugation. Thus pāqad (qal) means ‘oversee’; hiphqīd (hiphil) means ‘cause to oversee’, i.e. ‘entrust to’. The pual and hophal conjugations are the passives of piel and hiphil respectively. And the hithpael conjugation is primarily the reflexive of the piel; thus from the root q-d-sh noticed above the qal means ‘be holy’, the piel ‘make holy’, and the hithpael ‘make oneself holy’. The hithpael has also frequently the sense of giving oneself out as doing something; thus from the root which gives us nābī, ‘a prophet’, we have a hithpael conjugation hithnabbē’, meaning ‘to act the prophet’.

     The names of the conjugations niphal, piel, pual, hiphil, hoph'al, hithpael, are actually the forms taken by these conjugations in the case of the verb al, ‘make’ or ‘do’.

     Much of the vivid, concrete and forthright character of our English Old Testament is really a carrying over into English of something of the genius of the Hebrew tongue. Biblical Hebrew does not deal with abstractions but with the facts of experience. It is the right sort of language for the record of the self-revelation of a God who does not make Himself known by philosophical propositions but by controlling and intervening in the course of human history. Hebrew is not afraid to use daring anthropomorphisms when speaking of God. If God imparts to men the knowledge of Himself, He chooses to do so most effectively in terms of human life and human language. So, where we should say that Moses, in his solitary communion with God on Mount Sinai, ‘suddenly became aware of the afterglow of the divine glory, so to speak’, the book of Exodus (33. 20-23) is much more vigorous and tells how God told Moses that he could not see His face, but would have an opportunity of seeing His back.

     Indirect speech is unknown to Biblical Hebrew; all speech is reported in the direct form, whether the words recorded were the actual words spoken or represent the general purport of what was said.

     Nations or groups of people are frequently given a personality and called after the name of their ancestor in such a way that one might almost think that an individual was being spoken of. When we open the book of Judges and read of Judah and Simeon his brother agreeing to help each other to take possession of their allotted territories, it is not the actual sons of Jacob that are meant, but the tribes descended from them. Another example of this sort of thing is the way in which the northern kingdom is personalized as Ephraim in the prophecy of Hosea. This expresses a Hebrew attitude to which the name ‘corporate personality’ has been given. So, too, when we read in Malachi 1. 2-3: ‘Was not Esau Jacob’s brother? saith the Lord: yet I loved Jacob; but Esau I hated’; it is not so much the two sons of Isaac that are meant but the two nations of Israel and Edom. (So also in the birth-oracle to Rebekah in Gen. 25. 23, the words ‘the elder shall serve the younger’ refer, not to the individuals Jacob and Esau, for Esau never served Jacob in that sense, but to the nations descended from the two brothers, for during long stretches of their history Edom was subject to Israel or Judah.)

But the words of Malachi, ‘I loved Jacob; but Esau I hated’, illustrate another feature of Hebrew thought and speech. Here a contrast is stated in extreme terms for the sake of emphasis. Of course, in this instance what is being emphasized is that Israel, by contrast with Edom, was the object of God’s electing love. But the same two words are used in contexts where it is as clear as daylight that ‘hate’ is not to be taken literally. We think of our Lord’s solemn affirmation: ‘If any man cometh unto Me, and hateth not his own father and mother and wife and children and brethren and sisters, yea, and his own life also, he cannot be My disciple’ (Luke 14. 26).     The Teacher of the law of universal love does not intend His followers to indulge in unnatural hatreds! What He means, of course, is that His disciples must give all other objects of love a second place in relation to their devotion to Him; the parallel passage in Matt. 10. 37 gives the sense in less paradoxical language: ‘He that loveth father or mother more than Me is not worthy of Me; and he that loveth son or daughter more than Me is not worthy of Me’. But the paradoxical idiom preserved in Luke’s version is in the true Hebraic style.

     If some expositors had been mindful of this type of idiom, they might not have been so quick to conclude that the Hebrew prophets denounced the whole idea of ritual sacrifice root and branch when they record God as saying, for example: ‘I desire mercy, and not sacrifice’ (Hos. 6. 6). Large areas of the Pentateuch certainly represent God as ordaining sacrifices. Are the prophets concerned to say that this is a misrepresentation? It has very frequently been thought so. We get a similar sentiment to Hosea’s in Jeremiah 7. 22-23: ‘For I spake not unto your fathers, nor commanded them in the day that I brought them out of the land of Egypt, concerning burnt offerings or sacrifices: but this thing I commanded them, saying, Hearken unto My voice, and I will be your God, and ye shall be My people: and walk ye in all the way that I command you, that it may be well with you’. Here again, Jeremiah has commonly been interpreted as denying the truth of the Pentateuchal narrative. But there is a possibility that the prophets are using extreme language for the sake of emphasis. If we look back at Hosea 6. 6, we see that the words, ‘I desire mercy, and not sacrifice’, are followed by the parallel thought: ‘and the knowledge of God more than burnt offerings’.

     [Some helpful thoughts on the meaning of this and similar passages are given by Professor H. H. Rowley in a pamphlet, The Unity of the Old Testament (Manchester, 1946), pp. 16 ff.]

     And this gives us the clue to what Hosea, as God’s spokesman, was insisting on. God did not want sacrifice for its own sake; what He wanted was obedient men and women, receptive of His self-revelation and loyal to the covenant which He had established with them. They were making the mistake of thinking that God wanted sacrifices and burnt offerings in themselves, whereas God wanted these only in so far as they expressed the inward and practical holiness of the worshippers. It was the same thing that God emphasized when speaking through Jeremiah―that it was not for the sake of burnt offerings and sacrifices that He gave them His law when He brought them out of Egypt, but in order that He might have a people responsive to His revealed character and will.

     [* It is possible that the words rendered ‘concerning’, in Jer. 7. 22, might be rendered ‘for the sake of’: so O. T. Allis, The Five Books of Moses (1943), pp. 168-171, approved in a review by W. F. Albright, A Journal of Biblical Literature, 62 (1943), p. 360, where C. von Orelli’s commentary on Jeremiah is cited to the same effect. But even if we keep the rendering ‘concerning’, the interpretation given above may stand, considering the Hebrew emphatic usage of ‘not’ in the sense ‘not only.’]

     We have wandered a considerable distance from the technicalities of language with which the chapter opened, but these technicalities are not ends in themselves, any more than burnt offerings and sacrifices are; they are but means to enable us to understand something of the mode in which God’s revelation was recorded, so that we may better appreciate for ourselves that revelation and the God who gave it.

Chapter 4―The Aramaic Language

     In one of the Rabbinical writings we meet the injunction: ‘Let not the Aramaic be lightly esteemed by thee, seeing that the Holy One (blessed be He!) hath given honour to it in the Law, the Prophets, and the Writings’. [Palestinian Talmud, tractate Sōtā, vii. 2.] This means that certain portions of the Old Testament are written not in Hebrew but in Aramaic, and that these portions are distributed between the three great divisions of the Hebrew Bible. [For these three divisions, the Law, the Prophets, and the Writings, see pp. 90 f.] The distribution, to be sure, is unequal; we find one Aramaic place-name in the Law (Gen. 31. 47), one verse in the Prophets (Jer. 10. 11), and two considerable sections in the Writings (Dan. 2. 4b-7.28 and Ezra 4. 8-6. 18; 7. 12-26).

     When Jacob and his father-in-law parted from each other in Transjordan, they made a mutual covenant and piled a cairn to mark the place and the occasion. Laban, we are told, called the cairn Yĕgar-sahădūthā, but Jacob called it Gal-ēd. Both these names have the same meaning, ‘The Cairn of Witness’, but Laban named it in Aramaic and Jacob in Hebrew. Probably the cairn was near the linguistic frontier between the Hebrew and Aramaic-speaking peoples, and was known as Gal-ēd to the dwellers on the west of it but as Yegar-sahadutha to those on the east.

     This is the first reference in the Bible to the Aramaic language. Aramaic, as we have seen, is, like Hebrew, a member of the Semitic family of languages. In Old Testament times it was spoken to the north and northeast of the Hebrew and Canaanite-speaking area. It was the language of the kingdom of Syria of which we read so much in the books of Kings, and was also spoken in the upper regions of the Euphrates valley. In view of the close relationship between the ancestors of the Israelites and Aramaic-speaking people, reflected in the patriarchal narratives of Genesis, it is not surprising to find Aramaisms in Old Testament Hebrew at quite an early date. One Aramaism has been detected in the Song of Deborah, which is thought to be practically contemporary with the victory it celebrates (c. 1150 B.C.); this is the word translated ‘rehearse’ in Judges 5. 11.

     An important stage in the history of the Aramaic language is reached in the eighth century B.C., when it came to be used as the language of diplomatic intercourse in the Assyrian Empire, for

communication between the Assyrians and their subjects and tributaries in Western Asia. It is interesting to note that Akkadian, which had served as the language of diplomatic intercourse in Western Asia in the fourteenth century, was no longer used for that purpose, even when the dominant power spoke what was practically that very language. An interesting example of this use of Aramaic is found in 2 Kings 18.17-37 (Isa. 36. 2-22).     There we read how the king of Assyria in 701 B.C. sent a delegation of his principal officers to Jerusalem to demand the surrender of the city. The delegation from King Hezekiah went out to confer with the Assyrians outside the city wall, and several of the citizens watched the proceedings from the top of the wall. One of the Assyrian delegates, referred to as the Rab-shakeh (literally ‘chief cup-bearer’; the word is a title and not a personal name), addressed Hezekiah’s messengers so loudly in Hebrew that they became alarmed for the morale of the citizens on the wall, and requested him to follow the usual diplomatic conventions and address them in Aramaic, ‘for,’ said they, ‘we understand it; don't address us in the Jewish language, for then the people on the wall will know what you are saying’. But the Rab-shakeh retorted that that was exactly why he chose to speak in Hebrew, that the common people of Jerusalem might know the fate that lay in store for them if their king and government refused to submit to Sennacherib. And with that he ignored Hezekiah’s delegates and addressed the people on the wall directly in Hebrew, in an attempt to seduce them from their allegiance to Hezekiah.

     This diplomatic use of Aramaic was continued under the Assyrians’ successors [For example, a letter written to the king of Egypt by one of his Palestinian or Syrian vassals about 600 B.C., discovered in 1942, is in Aramaic.] until the overthrow of the Persian Empire by Alexander the Great in 331 B.C. Aramaic was the tongue in which the Persian king and his civil service corresponded with his subjects in Western Asia and Egypt. The form of Aramaic used for this official purpose did not correspond exactly to any dialect of the spoken language; it was a conventional form of the language specialized for diplomatic use, a form which German scholars have called Reichsaramisch, i.e. ‘Aramaic of the Empire’, or, more simply, ‘King’s Aramaic’.

     In the light of this use of Aramaic under the Persian Empire it is specially interesting to look at the Aramaic portions of the book of Ezra. These portions contain a good deal of official correspondence belonging to the reigns of Darius I (521-486 B.C.) and Artaxerxes 1 (465-424 B.C.), kings of Persia. This correspondence is arranged according to subject-matter rather than in chronological order, but taking the letters in the order in which they come in our text we find the following five:

     1. Letter to Artaxerxes from Samaritan officials (4. 11-16).

     2. Letter from Artaxerxes to Samaritan officials (4. 17-22).

     3. Letter to Darius from the governor of the province of Syria (5. 7-17).

     4. Part of a letter (of which the beginning is lost) from Darius to the governor of Syria (6. 6-12).

     5. Letter from Artaxerxes to Ezra (7. 11-26).

     As such letters would in any case have been written in Aramaic, it is at least conceivable that in the Aramaic text of these parts of the Book of Ezra we are reading exact transcripts of the official documents. It appears, indeed, that the Aramaic of the Book of Ezra is the ‘king’s Aramaic’ of the Persian Foreign Office. If we could go so far as one German scholar, Professor H. H. Schaeder, who has argued that Ezra’s description as ‘scribe of the law of the God of heaven’ (7. 12) is another way of saying ‘Secretary of State for Jewish Affairs’, then the case for regarding the Aramaic originals of these letters as replicas of the actual text preserved in the imperial archives would be stronger still. The interest displayed by the Persian king in Jewish religious affairs, to which the letter of Artaxerxes to Ezra in particular bears witness, is not unparalleled, as we shall see.

     The single Aramaic verse in the Book of Jeremiah (10. 11) is a brief denunciation of doom against false gods, addressed to Gentile nations, and inserted in the midst of an address to Israel. It runs ‘Thus shall ye say unto them [i.e. to the nations mentioned in verse 10]: The gods that have not made the heavens and the earth, these shall perish from the earth, and from under the heavens’. It will conveniently illustrate the similarity of Aramaic to Hebrew if we give parallel transliterations of the Aramaic text of this verse and of a Hebrew translation, together with the English rendering word for word:

          Aramaic               Hebrew               English

          kidnah                    koh                    thus

          tĕmĕūn                    tōmĕrū                    ye-shall-say

          lĕhōm:                     lāhem:                     to-them:

          ᾿elāhayyā               hā-᾿elōhīm                the-gods

          dī                    ᾿asher                    that

          shĕmayyā               ha-shāmayim                the-heavens

          wĕ-᾿αρ               wĕ-hā-᾿ārets               and-the-earth

          lā                    lō                    not

          abadū,                    ᾿abĕdū,               have-made,

          yēbadū                    yōbĕdū                    shall-perish

          mē-᾿arā               mē-hā-᾿ārets                from-the-earth

          u-min-tĕchōth                u-mit-tachath                and-from-under

          shĕmayyā               ha-shāmayim                the-heavens

          ᾿ēlleh.                    ᾿ēlleh.                    these.

     An interesting point about the Aramaic of this verse is that the word for ‘the earth’ appears in two forms, ᾿arqā and ᾿ar ā, the former being characteristic of earlier Aramaic. The use of both forms in one sentence may imply a time when one was giving place to the other.

     The Aramaic section of the Book of Daniel begins with the reply of the Babylonian astrologers to Nebuchadnezzar's demand that they should interpret his dream (Dan. 2. 4b), and goes on to the end of Daniel’s vision of the four wild beasts in the first year of Belshazzar (7. 28). At the point where the Aramaic section begins, the English versions are misleading: A.V. has, ‘Then spake the Chaldeans to the king in Syriack’ (R.V. ‘in the Syrian language’; R.V. margin, ‘in Aramaic’). This implication that Aramaic was the language in which the Chaldeans addressed their king gave rise to the old-fashioned style of referring to the Aramaic language as ‘Chaldee’. This was a natural, if mistaken, inference in the days when the very memory of the language actually spoken by the Babylonians was lost. But as a matter of fact the Hebrew word ᾿ărdmīth (in Aramaic) in this verse is simply a sort of marginal note to draw attention to the fact that the Aramaic portion of the book is just about to begin; the narrative goes on immediately in literary Aramaic with the words malkā lĕ ālmīn cheyī, ‘O king, live for ever’ (the Hebrew for which would be ha-melek lĕ-ōlāmīm cheyī).

     Some well-known words in the Aramaic of Daniel are preserved untranslated in our English versions. These are the words which appeared on the wall at Belshazzar’s feast: mĕnē mĕnē tĕqēl u-pharsīn. We are not to suppose that the words as they were written were illegible, or even that, taken as separate words, they were unintelligible. They are common Aramaic words, indicating various weights. The first, mĕnē, appears in various Semitic languages (Heb. māneh; Akkadian manu, etc.), and from these it was borrowed at an early date by several Greek dialects in the form mna or mina. (In the parable of the pounds in Luke 19. 12-27 the word ‘pound’ represents Gk. mna, actually a weight of silver equivalent in value to about 4.) The next word of the inscription, tĕqēl, is the Aramaic equivalent of Heb. sheqel (shekel) and Akkadian shiqlu, which denoted a weight of about 0.4 oz. avoirdupois In Babylonia and Assyria sixty shekels made a maneh; in Palestine, fifty shekels. As for u-pharsīn, this is made up of u, one of the forms taken by the conjunction meaning ‘and’, and parsin, the plural of pĕrēs, ‘division’ (the p becoming ph after the vowel u). So at first sight the inscription on the wall seemed to say: “A mina, a mina, a shekel and half-minas’ (for pĕrēs is found in the sense ‘half-mina’ *).

     [*A. H. Sayce, following C. S. Clermont-Ganneau, gives a slightly different account: “In the Babylonian language . . . the mysterious words which appeared upon the wall would have been man mana sikla u bar’ si, ‘Reckon a maneh, a shekel and (its) parts’” (The Higher Criticism and the Verdict of the Monuments [1895], pp. 530 f.).]

     [But it was difficult to make any sense of that. If the words were written in Aramaic, however, they would be written without vowels, and might also be read as passive particples: mĕnē, tĕqīl, pĕris―’numbered, weighed, divided’. And this was the sense which Daniel gave to them; in the last one he also found a word-play on ‘Persia’, which has exactly the same consonants. So he explained the words thus:

     Mĕnē     God has numbered (mĕnā) your kingdom and brought it to an end.

     Tĕqēl     You are weighed (tĕqiltā) in the balances and found to be under weight.

     Pĕrēs     Your kingdom has been divided (pĕrīsath) and given to Media and Persia

          (lĕ-Mādai ū-Phārās).

     When the Israelites were in captivity in the provinces of the Assyrian and Babylonian Empires, it would have been natural for them to pick up Aramaic as a convenient means of communicating with the other peoples among whom they found themselves, many of whom had also been uprooted form the territories west of the Euphrates. With the downfall of the Babylonian Empire, many of these exiles returned home in accordance with the new and enlightened policy of the Persian kings. But some of them, on their return to Palestine, found themselves no longer able to speak the Hebrew tongue of their forefathers. This may also have been so with some of the people who had remained in Palestine, as a result possibly of intermarriage with non Jews. We may remember how incensed Nehemiah was when he found the children of mixed marriages unable to speak Hebrew. [Neh. 13. 124.] Hebrew by no means ceased after the exile; the prophets Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi uttered their oracles in Hebrew, and the fact that nearly all the post-exilic literature in the Old Testament is in Hebrew implies a Hebrew reading public. But from the time of the exile onwards Aramaic steadily spread as the Palestinian vernacular at the expense of Hebrew, until the situation became the reverse of what had obtained in Hezekiah’s time. Then, the common people knew Hebrew, and Aramaic was known only to a few who had occasion to use it for special purposes; now, an increasing number of the general population used Aramaic as the language of daily life, and Hebrew became increasingly restricted to religious uses. There is a well-known scene in Nehemiah 8, where at the Feast of Tabernacles in 444 B.C. (though some would date it fifty years later [But see the arguments for the earlier dating in J. Stafford Wright’s Tyndale Old Testament Lecture for 1946, The Date of Ezra’s Coming to Jerusalem.]) a great congregation is said to have assembled at Jerusalem ‘into the broad place that was before the water gate’ to hear Ezra and his assistants read ‘the book of the law of Moses’. According to verse eight, ‘they read in the book, in the law of God, with an interpretation, and gave the sense, so that they understood the reading’. The Hebrew word mĕphōrāsh, translated ‘with an interpretation’ in the R.V. margin here, is the exact equivalent of Aramaic mĕphārash, which was actually employed as a technical term in the diplomatic service of the Persian Empire to denote the procedure when an official read an Aramaic document straight off in the vernacular language of the particular province concerned. (This is by no means a difficult thing to do for one who knows both languages.) So, while opinions differ about the real meaning of Neh. 8. 8, it seems reasonable to infer that as the Law was read aloud in Hebrew, an oral interpretation in Aramaic was also provided for those to whom Hebrew was no longer familiar. If this is the right interpretation of the verse, then we have here the earliest recorded example of a targum or oral paraphrase of the Hebrew text of Scripture, of which we shall have more to say in Chapter XI.

     Between the years 1898 and 1908 a remarkable collection of texts was found in the vicinity of the first cataract of the Nile, which proved to emanate from a Jewish colony which was settled in those parts in the time of the Persian Empire, particularly at the place now called Aswan and the river-island hard by which the ancient Egyptians called Yeb (known in Greek times as Syene and Elephantine). These documents are for the most part papyri, and the language used is Aramaic. Their dates range over almost the whole of the fifth century B.C., during which Egypt was under Persian control.

     [It has lately been announced that another collection o Aramaic papyri from Egypt, which has lain unstudied in America for fifty years, is now being edited by Professor E. G. Kraeling of New York, and will soon be published. This collection is said to be comparable in extent and importance to the above-mentioned Elephantine papyri.]

     The Jewish colony in question had originated with Jewish mercenary soldiers employed by Psammetichus II of Egypt (593-588 B.C.) in a war against Ethiopia, who at the end of the war were settled in the two southern fortresses of Syene and Elephantine. They actually had a temple of their own at Elephantine. This was technically a contravention of the law of the single sanctuary laid down in Deut. 12. 5 ff: but then Deuteronomy did not envisage a Jewish community living far away from the Holy Land.     Another surprising feature of their religious usage was the use of Canaanite religious terminology in conjunction with the name of Israel’s God (which appears there in the form Yahu); we find such compound divine names as Anath-Yahu, Anath-Bethel, Ishum-Bethel, Herem-Bethel. But while these names reflect the tendency to syncretism so prevalent in the centuries immediately following the Israelite conquest of Canaan, it is likely that at this later date they were little more than names under which various aspects of Yahu were hypostatized. Anath we know, for example, to have been an ancient Canaanite goddess (she appears in the Ras Shamra tablets as the sister of Baal), but those scholars are hardly on the right track who infer that the Elephantine Jews still regarded her as the consort of Yahu.

     The Jewish temple at Elephantine was already built when Cambyses of Persia conquered Egypt in 525 B.C. It stood for over a century, but was destroyed in 410 B.C. in an anti Jewish pogrom instigated by the priests of the Egyptian god, Khnub, with the approval of Waidrang, the acting Persian governor of the province. The Elephantine Jews sent a letter to the high priest at Jerusalem, asking him to use his influence in their behalf, but no answer came. We can quite understand that the high priest would not approve of any temple but that at Jerusalem. It is interesting that this high priest was Johanan, the son of Eliashib who was high priest in the time of Nehemiah, in the preceding generation (cf. Neh. 3. 1; 12. 23). The Elephantine Jews waited for three years, and then, giving up hope of any help from Johanan, they sent a letter to Bigvai, Persian governor of Judaea, and one in similar terms to Delaiah and Shelemiah, the sons of Sanballat, governor of Samaria (cf. Neh. 2. 10, 19, etc.). The letter sent to Johanan is not extant, but two copies of that sent to Bigvai have been preserved, in which reference is made to the earlier and fruitless letter. The letter to Bigvai procured the desired reaction; a reply is preserved in another of the Elephantine papyri, which runs:

     “Memorandum from Bigvai and Delaiah. They said to me: ‘Let it be a memorandum to you in Egypt to speak to Arsames [Persian governor of Egypt] concerning the altar-house of the God of heaven, which was built in the fortress of Yeb formerly, before Cambyses, which Waidrang, that reprobate, destroyed in the 14th year of King Darius [i.e., Darius II, 423-404 B.C.], that it be rebuilt in its place as it was before, and let them offer meal-offerings and incense upon that altar as was done formerly’.]

     The mention of this altar at Elephantine is connected by some scholars with the prophecy in Isa. 19. 19 of a coming day when ‘there shall be an altar to the LORD in the midst of the land of Egypt’. Whether there is in fact any such connection is not certain; but what is certain is that the correspondence illustrates the generally liberal and tolerant policy of the Persian Empire with regard to the religious liberty of its subject peoples, which is also reflected in the Books of Ezra and Nehemiah. It has been questioned whether the Persian king would, in fact, have interested himself in such details of Jewish religious practice as are mentioned in the letter of Artaxerxes to Ezra (Ezra 7. 12-26). But we must not suppose that the terms of this letter imply a personal interest on the king’s part; the letter is issued by the particular department of state dealing with these affairs, but bears the king’s name because it is an official government document.     As A. E. Cowley says: ‘one can imagine the king, when once his consent had been obtained, saying, “Very well, then, give the man an order for what he wants”. The order would then be drawn up by the Minister for Foreign Affairs, probably advised by Ezra himself, and sealed by the king’s seal bearer. Granted the initial goodwill of the king, there is nothing improbable about the rest’.

     [Jewish Documents of the Time of Ezra (1919), p. 17. Schaeder would say that the order was drawn up by Ezra himself, as Secretary of State for Jewish Affairs.]

     And an interesting parallel is found in one of the Elephantine papyri which contains instructions to the Jewish colony, sent from the king through Arsames the governor, with regard to the celebration of the Feast of Unleavened Bread from Nisan 15 to 21 in the year 419 B.C. The letter is written by a Jew named Hananiah, who had a position of some influence at the Persian court. It is unfortunately mutilated, but in its original state it probably contained directions about the Passover as well.

     Aramaic remained the vernacular tongue of Palestine, as well as of Syria and other adjoining territories, until the Arab conquest of these lands in the seventh century A.D. It was thus the language commonly spoken in Palestine in New Testament times, the customary language of our Lord and His apostles and the early Palestinian church. Some Aramaic words and phrases from these first decades of Christian history have been taken over untranslated into the Greek New Testament. We have one or two short sentences preserved in Aramaic from the lips of Christ Himself, such as talitha qumi, in Mark 5. 41 (Little girl, get up), ephphatha, representing a dialect form of ᾿ithpattach, in Mark 7. 34 (Be opened), and the cry of dereliction on the Cross, Eloi Eloi lama sabachthani (᾿Elāhī ᾿Elāhī lĕmā shĕbagtanī), in Mark 1. 34. These last words are not the Hebrew original of Psa. 22. 1 which runs Elī ᾿Elī lāmā azabtanī, but an Aramaic version.

     Then we read in Mark 14. 36 how Jesus prayed in the Garden of Gethsemane, ᾿Abbā, Father, all things are possible unto thee’. While ᾿Abbā is an Aramaic word, it made its way into Hebrew use as well; to this day a Hebrew-speaking boy will address his father as ᾿Abbā. But in addressing God, Jews did not and do not employ this form, the affectionate term for intimate use within the family, but the more formal ᾿Abī, ‘my father’, or ᾿Abīnū, ‘our Father’. Jesus, however, of set purpose used the intimate and affectionate form ᾿Abbā when addressing God, and His example was followed by the early Christians, who used the same Aramaic word. So Paul, in Rom. 8. 15 and Gal. 4. 6, reckons it a sign that God has sent the Spirit of His Son, ‘the spirit of sonship’, into the hearts of believers in Christ when they pray ᾿Abba, Father’.

     [In Mark 14. 36; Rom. 8. 15, and Gal. 4. 6, ‘Abba, Father,’ represents Abba, ho patēr of the Greek New Testament, where ho patēr (the FatherA) is added to Abba as its Greek equivalent. It should be added that the simple form for ‘a father’ in both Hebrew and Aramaic is ᾿āb; where Hebrew puts the definite article in front of the noun (hā-āb); Aramaic, which has no definite article, uses instead what is called the ‘emphatic state’ of the noun, which is characterized by the suffix –ā (᾿abbā).]

     Many grandiloquent phrases are often employed in addressing God in prayer and worship but none of them is so Christian as the simple ᾿Abba, ‘Father,’ used by our Lord.

     Another Aramaism which was current in some early churches, even those which were Greek speaking, was the phrase Maranā thā, ‘Our Lord, come!’ This is found in 1 Cor. 16. 22, and also in

a document called The Teaching of the Apostles, recording the usage of the churches in or around Antioch, probably, about the end of the first Christian century, where it comes at the end of the service of Holy Communion: ‘Let grace come and let this world pass away. Hosanna to the God of David. If any is holy, let him come; if any is not, let him repent. Marana tha. Amen’.

     The word ‘mammon’ found here and there in the Gospels is apparently an Aramaic word māmōnā from the same root as ‘Amen’ (Hebrew ᾿āmēn), and meaning originally ‘that in which one puts his trust’. Several of the place-names and personal names in the Gospels are also Aramaic, such as Golgotha (Aram. gulgoltā, ‘the skull’), Gabbatha (literally ‘ridge’ or ‘hill’ but used in John 19. 13 as the equivalent of Gk. lithostrōton, a tesselated pavement), Martha (mistress), Thomas (tĕchōmā, ‘twin’).

     Besides the actual Aramaic words and phrases preserved in the New Testament, the Greek text itself, particularly of the Gospels and some sections of the Acts, is sometimes strongly marked by Aramaic idioms, and appears in places to have been translated from Aramaic. This is what we should expect, of course, in reports of the sayings of our Lord and of other speakers who spoke in Aramaic. But we should scrutinize carefully theories which represent our Gospels as such as having originally been written in Aramaic. [See pp. 70 f.]

     Within a very few decades Palestinian Aramaic gave place to Greek as the general language of Christianity, but there was one very important body of churches which continued to use Aramaic,

though not the Palestinian dialect, and we shall have something more to say of them in Chapter XV.

Chapter 5―The Greek Language

     Although Aramaic appears to have been the common language of our Lord and of the earliest Christians, it is not the language of the New Testament. The revelation under the old covenant, which was in the first instance communicated to one particular nation, was appropriately expressed and recorded in the language of that nation. But the fuller revelation given under the new covenant was not intended to be restricted in this way. The words spoken by the aged Simeon when he saw the infant Saviour (Luke 2. 30-32) had not long to wait for their fulfillment once that Saviour had accomplished His work of salvation:

               Mine eyes have seen thy salvation,

               Which thou hast prepared before the face of all peoples;

               A light for revelation to the Gentiles,

               And the glory of thy people Israel.

     The Evangelist who narrates this incident closes his Gospel by telling how Jesus laid down a programme for His disciples ‘that repentance and remission of sins should be preached in His name unto all the nations, beginning from Jerusalem’ (Luke 24. 47).

     The language most appropriate for the propagation of this message would naturally be one that was most widely known throughout all the nations, and this language lay ready to hand. It was the Greek language, which, at the time when the Gospel began to be proclaimed among all the nations, was a thoroughly international language, spoken not only around the Aegean shores but all over the Eastern Mediterranean and in other areas too. Greek was no strange tongue to the Apostolic Church even in the days when it was confined to Jerusalem, for the membership of the primitive Jerusalem Church included Greek-speaking Jews as well as Aramaic-speaking Jews. These Greek-speaking Jewish Christians (or Hellenists) are mentioned in Acts 6. r, where we read that they complained of the unequal attention paid to the widows of their group by contrast with those of the Hebrews or Aramaic-speaking Jews. To remedy this situation seven men were appointed to take charge of it, and it is noteworthy that (to judge by their names) all seven were Greek-speaking Jewish Christians.

     Greek belongs to the Indo-European family of languages, as Hebrew and Aramaic belong to the Semitic family. That is to say, Greek (in common with many other European and Asiatic languages) developed from a dialect of an original Indo-European language as the people who spoke that language spread out from a common centre. The Indo-European linguistic family comprises twelve groups, two of which are no longer represented by any spoken language. These two are Hittite, [See the writer’s Tyndale Lecture, The Hittites and the Old Testament (1947).] spoken between 2,000 and 700 B.C. in Asia Minor and Syria, and Tocharian, the name popularly given to a few related languages [In particular, two languages now called more accurately Agnean and Kutchean.] known from some texts of the second half of the first millennium A.D. which were found during the present century in Chinese Turkestan.

     The ten groups which are still represented by living languages are (1) those languages of India which are akin to the ancient Sanskrit, * (2) Iranian, including the ancient and modern languages of Persia and some neighbouring territories, ** (3) Slavonic, represented nowadays by Russian, Ukrainian, Polish, Czech, Slovak, and the languages of Yugoslavia and Bulgaria, (4) Baltic, represented nowadays by Latvian and Lithuanian, (5) Germanic, represented by English, German, Dutch, and the Scandinavian languages, (6) Celtic, (7) Italic, represented in antiquity chiefly by Latin and today by the Romance languages, (8) Illyrian, represented nowadays by Albanian, (9) Thraco-Phrygian, represented nowadays by Armenian, and (10) Greek.

     [* Also Singalese and Romany. There are many other linguistic families represented in India, bearing no relation either to Indo-European or to each other. Of these the most important is Dravidian, represented by Tamil and Telugu.]

     [**Hindustani (Urdu) is really more akin to Iranian than to Indian. The Indo-Iranian groups of the Indo-European family of languages are also known as the Aryan languages. The word Aryan should not be used outside the Indo-Iranian field, and should be used only in a linguistic, never in a racial, sense.]

     Greek first appears in history as the language spoken by three successive waves of immigrants who entered the Balkan Peninsula from the north. These waves belong to different periods in the course of the millennium 2000-1000 B.C., and they are known respectively as the Ionian, Achaean and Dorian waves. Down to 300 B.C. the various Greek dialects can be classified in three groups corresponding to these three immigrations. As the Ionians were the first body of Greeks to come south into Greece, they were pressed from behind by their successors, and most of them were pushed out of Greece proper to find a home across the Aegean Sea. There they came in contact with the peoples of Asia. As the Asiatic nations thus knew the Ionians before they knew any other Greeks, they used the term ‘Ionians’ as the general name for Greeks. In Hebrew the Greeks were called the bĕnē Yāwān, the sons of Yawan or Javan, a name which is identical with Ion, the eponymous ancestor of the Ionians. One important group of Ionians remained on the Greek mainland, however, when their fellow-Ionians sought new homes overseas; these were the inhabitants of Attica, the district around Athens. At a later time not only the Ionians but the other Greeks as well went far afield founding colonies―in Asia Minor, Libya, Cyprus, Crete, Sicily, South Italy, Marseilles, and around the coasts of the Black Sea, including the Crimea. The Greek world was divided into a great number of small states, but wherever the Greek language was spoken, there was Greece. Greek, then, has been spoken in the Aegean world [The Greek settlements in Asia Minior, maintained for 3000 years, came to an abrupt end in 1923 with the exchange of populations which followed the Grco-Turkish War.] for over 3500 years; it boasts a literature extending back from the present day to nearly 1000 B.C. The oldest monuments of Greek literature―the Homeric epics, the Iliad and Odyssey―stand in the front rank of the world’s classics. For delicate expressiveness and flexibility classical Greek stands unsurpassed among the languages of man kind. We cannot do better than quote the words of Mr. E. K. Simpson, written in his own inimitable style:

     “No competent judge can dispute the claim of Greek to pre-eminence in any congress of languages, ancient or modern. In its golden prime it presents an unrivalled combination of elegance and vigour, of variety of style and precision of statement. ‘The instrument responds’, remarks Jebb, ‘with happy elasticity to every demand of the Greek intellect’. And when we call to mind the felicities of its characteristic idioms, the repleteness of its syntax, the intricate harmonies of its prosody, and the sonorous cadences of its statelier prose, or reflect on the copious invention exhibited in its teeming vocabulary; and then bethink ourselves of the monumental longevity of the tongue, the siege of time it has sustained without capitulation; the title of Greek to homage in any symposium of the commonwealth of letters must be fully conceded.

     [Words Worth Weighing in the Greek New Testament (Tyndale New Testament Lecture 1944), p. 5.]

     As Greek is better known than Hebrew, it seems unnecessary to mention some of the outstanding features of the language as was done in Chapter III for Hebrew. The information, for those who desire it, lies ready to hand in such introductions as Mr. Nunn’s Elements [H. P. V. Nunn, The Elements of New Testament Greek (Cambridge University Press).] and Mr. Vine’s Grammar. [W. E. Vine, A New Testament Greek Grammar (Pickering & Inglis Ltd.).] It is nowhere more sadly true than in the acquisition of Greek that ‘a little learning is a dangerous thing’. The uses of the Greek article, *** the functions of Greek prepositions, and the fine distinctions between Greek tenses †† are confidently expounded in public at times by men who find considerable difficulty in using these parts of speech accurately in their native tongue.

     [*** The members of a certain sect, who emphasize that the true rendering of the last clause of John 1. 1 is ‘the word was a god’, prove nothing thereby save their ignorance of Greek grammar.]

     [† The non-local senses of prepositions cannot be learned from a diagram illustrating their local senses; and even the local senses of prepositions in Biblical Greek differ somewhat from the usages of classical Greek.]

     [†† This is particularly to be noted in the theological inferences which have been unwarrantably drawn from the uses of the aorist tense.]

     But if the inevitable limitations of self-instruction be borne in mind, and the rare grace of humility be sedulously cultivated, even a little learning can be rendered less dangerous than it normally is and used to profit in the study of the New Testament. This profit will be all the greater if the study is pursued with the aid of such a work as Mr. Vine’s Expository Dictionary. [W. E. Vine, Expository Dictionary of New Testament Words (4 vols., Oliphants, 1939-41).]

     As we saw in Chapter II, the Greek alphabet was derived at a fairly early date from the Phoenicians

     [See pp. 18 ff.; it is the Ionic alphabet of twenty-four letters that became the standard Greek alphabet.]

     This does not argue a close acquaintance on the part of the Greeks with the Phoenician coastland, as the Phoenicians were mariners and traders who for some centuries dominated the Mediterranean. The Greeks make but little appearance in the Old Testament. Some of their earlier settlements are listed among the ‘sons of Javan’ (bĕnē Yāwān) in Gen. 10. 4 and 1 Chron. 1. 7. [See p. 40.] Joel (3. 6) upbraids the Phoenicians and Philistines for selling Jews as slaves to the Greeks; Zechariah (9. 13) alludes to an outbreak of strife between the Jews and the Greeks; Daniel refers to the Grco-Persian wars of the fifth century B.C. and to the fortunes of Alexander the Great and his successors (see especially 11. 2 ff.). In the list of musical instruments played when Nebuchadnezzar’s great image was set up in the plain of Dura (Dan. 3. 5, etc.) three of the Aramaic words are probably Greek in origin: gaithrōs (harp) from Gk. kitharis, pĕsantērīn (psaltery) from Gk. psaltērion, and sūmponyā (dulcimer; R.V. m., bagpipe) from Gk. symphōnia.

     A Greek (or a Hellene, to use the name by which they called themselves) was a man whose native language and culture were Greek; and Greece (or Hellas, to use the Greek word) extended as far as the Greek language and culture did, with no implication of political unity. The Greeks were politically the most disunited of peoples. At one period the majority of the Greek states did succeed in combining for a common aim, and that was when they were in imminent danger of being forcibly incorporated in the Persian Empire by Darius I in 490 B.C., and again by his son, Xerxes, ten years later. After the defeat of the Persians, the Athenians made an attempt to found a maritime empire, consisting chiefly of the Greek islands of the Aegean, but this empire collapsed in 404 B.C. Further attempts at some degree of cooperation in the following century were short-lived, until political unity was imposed on the states of Greece proper by Philip of Macedon in 338 B.C. Philip’s intention was to lead a united Grco-Macedonian empire against the Persians, but he was assassinated in 336, and left his ambitions together with his newly-won empire to his son, Alexander the Great. Alexander’s conquests in Asia and Africa spread Greek civilization still further afield; from his time onward Greek was established for many centuries as the common language of the lands bordering the Eastern Mediterranean. The conditions attending and following the Macedonian conquest tended to break down the older difference between the Greek dialects, and the last three centuries B.C. witnessed the rise of ‘Hellenistic’ Greek, frequently called the ‘common speech’ of Greek―the koin diatektos―because it was the form of Greek in widest commonalty spread. The koin drew upon several of the older Greek dialects for its distinctive features, but chiefly upon Attic (the dialect of Athens and the neighbouring territory).

     Hellenistic Greek became the official language of the empires into which Alexander’s domain was divided after his death (323 B.C.), including those which one after the other dominated the Holy Land―the Ptolemaic Empire in Egypt, which dominated it until 198 B.C., and the Seleucid Empire in Syria, which won Palestine from Egypt as a result of the Battle of Panion in that year, and controlled it until the Hasmoneans established their brief age of Jewish independence about 141 B.C. and maintained it for nearly eighty years.

     When Palestine was incorporated into the Roman Empire in 63 B.C., as part of the province of Syria, Greek continued to be the common language of those parts as in the eastern Roman Empire generally. The Roman Empire was thoroughly bilingual. In the Roman army Latin was the official language in all parts of the Empire, but for the rest, Greek remained the official tongue in the Eastern Mediterranean lands. In the city of Rome itself Greek was spoken as much as Latin, in the highest and lowest classes alike. To the highest classes Greek was a language of education and culture; a man like Cicero wrote Greek as easily as Latin. As for the lowest classes, slaves and freedmen were largely Greek-speaking by birth. The early Roman Christians were obviously Greek-speaking; when Paul wrote his letter to the Roman church, he wrote it in Greek, though he could no doubt have written Latin if necessary. When Clement wrote his letter on behalf of the Roman church to the church at Corinth about A.D. 95, Greek was again the language of communication. Indeed, up to the beginning of the third century Greek appears to have been the chief language used by the Roman Christians, although Latin was making headway and soon superseded it.

     Until about sixty years ago the Greek of the New Testament stood almost alone in Greek literature as a peculiar form of Greek. Richard Rothe, a German theologian, explained its peculiarity by calling it ‘a language of the Holy Ghost’―presumably devised specially for the occasion of writing the New Testament.

     [Zur Dogmatik (1863), p. 238. Of course, in the providence of God, koin Greek was available for this use when the Gospel came in the fullness of time; but this is not what Rothe meant.]

     But others saw more clearly what the nature of New Testament Greek really was. It is recorded, for example, that Bishop Lightfoot, lecturing in 1863, referred to a Greek word occurring in the New Testament but not found in classical literature outside the fifth century B.C. writer, Herodotus, and said:

     “You are not to suppose that the word had fallen out of use in the interval, only that it had not been used in the books which remain to us; probably it had been part of the common speech all along. I will go further, and say that if we could only recover letters that ordinary people wrote to each other without any thought of being literary, we should have the greatest possible help for the understanding of the language of the New Testament generally.”

     [Quoted by J. H. Moulton, Prolegomena (1908), p. 242. In the General Introduction to Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (1930), pp. xii, xiii, similar hints are quoted from Masson (1859), Donaldson (1876), and Farrar (1884).]

     It was not long before this remarkable prophecy was put to the test. From the 1880’s onwards large numbers of the very sort of thing that Lightfoot desiderated―letters and other documents written by ordinary people, from the centuries immediately preceding and following the time of Christ―have come to light after two millennia of burial in the sands of Egypt. Many of these are written on scraps of papyrus, and others on pieces of pottery (ostraca). These vernacular documents, recovered from ancient rubbish-dumps, proved to be written in a kind of Greek strikingly similar to the Greek of the New Testament. The ‘language of the Holy Ghost’ turned out to be the language of the common people―which is just what we should expect. (One still finds good people, all the same, who imagine that He has a decided preference for Elizabethan or Jacobean English!)

     The person responsible for first pointing out the affinity between vernacular koin Greek and the New Testament idiom was the great German scholar, Adolf Deissmann, who embodied his researches in this field in a monumental work entitled Licht vom Osten, translated into English under the name, Light from the Ancient East. While he was a pastor at Marburg, Deissmann was turning over in the University Library at Heidelberg a publication containing selections from recently discovered Greek papyri. As he looked at these texts he was suddenly impressed by the similarity between their language and New Testament Greek, and further study confirmed this first impression. In this country the study was taken up by some distinguished scholars, outstanding among whom were J. H. Moulton and G. Milligan, joint-editors of The Vocabulary of the Greek Testament, a great work in which the lexical information supplied by these papyri and other non-literary sources is arranged alphabetically.

     [Other British scholars of the present time whose work in this field is worthy of mention include Principal W. F. Howard, who has continued J. H. Moulton’s Grammar of New Testament Greek, Professor L. R. Palmer, and Dr. H. G. Meecham.]

     Of course, there are wide differences of style within the New Testament, and we must not exaggerate the extent to which New Testament Greek resembles the idiom of the vernacular papyri, as has been done by some writers who have incautiously used language implying that New Testament Greek can nowadays be accounted for entirely in terms of these new discoveries. Much depends on the starting-point from which the student approaches New Testament Greek. ‘Any man,’ says Professor A. D. Nock, of Harvard, ‘who knows his classical Greek authors and reads the New Testament and then looks into the papyri is astonished at the similarities which he finds. Any man who knows the papyri first and then turns to Paul is astonished at the differences’.

     [Journal of Biblical Literature, 52 (1933), p. 138; from an article on ‘The Vocabulary of the New Testament.’]

     Paul, we may say, comes roughly halfway between the vernacular and more literary styles. The Epistle to the Hebrews and the First Epistle of Peter are true literary works, and much of their vocabulary is to be understood by the aid of a classical lexicon rather than one which draws upon non-literary sources.

     [We may wonder that a Galilan fisherman of provincial speech should produce a work of such high literary quality as 1 Peter; Dean Selwyn and others have pointed to the mention of Silvanus in 1 Peter 5. 12 by way of explanation.]      

     The Gospels contain more really vernacular Greek, as we might expect, since they report so much conversation by ordinary people. This is true even of Luke’s Gospel. Luke himself was master of a fine literary style, as appears from the first four verses of his Gospel, but in both Gospel and Acts he adapts his style to the characters and scenes that he portrays. We may quote Mr. Simpson again for the kind of light that the vernacular papyri cast on New Testament Greek:

     “In recent years we have been flooded with testifications to the vernacularity of the New Testament; so much indeed that methinks the balance needs to be somewhat redressed. Unquestionably we owe a debt to the Egyptian papyri and inscriptional lore that cannot be ignored. They have shed light on many incidental points in the sacred text and supplied parallels to many anomalous grammatical forms. When we wish to ascertain the exact sense of logia or apographē, or of a phrase like synairein logon (Matt. 18. 23), ‘to square accounts’, or hoi anastatountes hymns (Gal. 5. 12), ‘your upsetters’, the papyri stand us in good stead. They illustrate the language of the marketplace or the courts of law, wherever such aspects of life crop out in the Gospels or Epistles. In wayside episodes popular diction suits the speakers. Ti skylleis ton didaskalon? (Mark 5. 35), ‘Why do you bother the teacher?’ matches with the lips in which the sentence is placed. It tallies perfectly with its popular environment, and, needless to say, can be plentifully paralleled from the papyri, so large a proportion of which are scribbled waste-papers, which betray by their misspellings the hand of illiterate scrawlers. As long as Scriptural writers hug the coast of mundane affairs, the Egyptian pharos yields a measure of illumination to their track; but when they launch out into the deeps of the divine counsels, we no longer profit by its twinkling cross-lights. [Words Worth Weighing in the Greek New Testament, pp. 6 f. I have replaced the Greek script of the original by italics.]

     It is not from the papyri and ostraca alone that we derive our knowledge of vernacular Greek. As far back as Plato, and even Herodotus, we find a strain of colloquial Greek present in the literature, especially in reports of ordinary people’s conversation. We find this, for example, in some of Plato’s simpler dialogues, in the mime-writers, in the fifteenth idyll of Theocritus, and in Menander, the outstanding poet of the New Comedy at Athens. We may be sure, too, that many of the words peculiar to the dialogue parts of Aristophanes, the great poet of the Old Attic Comedy (at the end of the fifth century B.C.), are not to be regarded as words peculiar to comedy, but simply as ordinary words of everyday speech which do not happen to be used by other writers because they were not of literary quality.

     Again, koin or Hellenistic Greek is not confined to the vernacular speech. There was a flourishing koin literature in the centuries before and after the time of Christ. ‘Those who are familiar with the Greek New Testament,’ writes Dr. Basil Atkinson, ‘will recognize that Polybius stands much nearer to it than he does to Thucydides or Plato.... The writings of Luke are in a direct line of descent from those of Polybius’. [B. F. C. Atkinson, The Greek Language (1930), pp 280 f.] A study of New Testament Greek which concentrated on the parallels with the vernacular koin of the papyri and ostraca, to the exclusion of the literary koin of the Hellenistic writers, would be sadly unbalanced. Mr. E. K. Simpson, who has for many years made a special study of the New Testament vocabulary from this last viewpoint, has at various times drawn attention to most remarkable and suggestive parallels in style and diction not only with the great Hellenistic writers, such as Polybius, Strabo, Epictetus, Lucian and Plutarch, and the Jewish writers, Philo and Josephus, but also with such obscure and (in themselves) unimportant people as Vettius Valens the astrologer and Philodemus the Palestinian rhetorician. Nor is Mr. Simpson alone in pointing out the importance of this comparative study.

     The study of Hellenistic Greek, both in its literary and in its vernacular form, has shown how older Biblical scholars sometimes drew unwarranted inferences from New Testament phraseology by interpreting it according to the strict rules of the classical Greek of the fifth and fourth centuries B.C. One frequently noted feature of Hellenistic Greek is its modification of the earlier senses of the prepositions. In this it represents a stage in the development from classical Greek to modern Greek. For example, the encroachment of eis (originally meaning ‘into’) upon en (originally meaning ‘in’), which led in time to the complete disappearance of en from the Greek vocabulary, is abundantly evident in the New Testament. Attempts of earlier scholars, such as Bishop Westcott, to make fine distinctions between the senses of these two prepositions in such a passage as John I. 18 (where ‘in the bosom of the Father’ is expressed by eis and not by en) have been rendered superfluous in the light of the newer knowledge.

     [I think however (though this may be illogical conservatism on my part!) that a distinction is preserved in the New Testament between eis and en when followed by the noun onoma (‘name’). While en tō onomati or epi tō onomati means ‘in (or ‘with’) the name’ or ‘on the authority’ of someone, I suggest that eis to onoma implies a transference of ownership, as when we today speak of paying money ‘into someone’s name.’ This is noteworthy in the baptismal formul of the New Testament: baptism ‘into the name’ of the Triune God (Matt. 28. 19), or ‘into the name of the Lord Jesus’ (Acts 8. 16; 19. 5; cf. 1 Cor. I. 13, 15), is the sign that He is Lord and that the baptized person belongs to Him; baptism ‘in the name of Jesus Christ’ (Acts 2. 38; 10. 48) probably refers to the pronouncing of His name by the baptizer (cf. Jas. 2. 7; Acts 15. 17) or the invoking of His name by the baptized person (Acts 22. 16).]

     It was not only prepositions that had their meanings modified in Hellenistic Greek. The conjunction hina, which in classical Greek introduces a clause denoting purpose (in order that...), has a considerably wider range of meaning in the New Testament. When it appears in John 17. 3, for example (this is life eternal, that they may know thee), we need not infer that the knowledge of God is the purpose of eternal life, as we should if hina were used here with its classical force, but simply that eternal life consists in the knowledge of God―as a hymn puts it, ‘᾿Tis eternal life to know Him’. And there is one remarkable saying in the Gospels where hina in one Gospel appears as the equivalent of the conjunction hoti in another. The Gospel where hina appears is Mark, where we read in 4. 11, 12: ‘unto them that are without, all things are done in parables: that (Gk, hina) seeing they may see, and not perceive; and hearing they may hear, and not understand; lest haply they should turn again, and it should be forgiven them’. This looks at first sight as if our Lord’s purpose in teaching by parables was to make it impossible for some of His hearers to repent and receive forgiveness. But in fact He was describing the attitude of heart which these people had already adopted. The parallel passage in Matt. 13. 13 runs: ‘Therefore speak I to them in parables; because (Gk. hoti) seeing they see not, and hearing they hear not, neither do they understand’. We might, in fact, paraphrase the passage in Mark as follows: ‘The revelation of the kingdom of God, which was formerly a secret, has been given to you; but all these things take the form of riddles to those who are outside, who ††† see, to be sure, but do not perceive the real meaning; who hear, to be sure, but fail to understand; and in consequence cannot return and receive forgiveness’.

     [††† It is evident, on a consideration of the text of this passage in Mark, that the quotation from Isa. 6. 9, 10 is introduced according to the Targumic interpretation (see p. 132); this has suggested the use of ‘who’ in the paraphrase here.]

     So much, indeed, did hina extend its range of meaning that in time the construction with hina followed by the subjunctive mood superseded the older infinitive forms of the verb, and hina (in a shortened form na) with the subjunctive is the regular form of the infinitive in modern Greek.

     A good example of change of meaning between the classical and Hellenistic periods is afforded by the verb laleō, which in the earlier period means ‘chat’, ‘babble’, ‘prattle’ (as in child’s talk), but in the New Testament appears as the ordinary verb meaning ‘speak’, be the speaker God or men. [This question sometimes arises in connection with the use of this verb in 1 Cor. 14. 34..]

     The word parousia is one whose New Testament meaning is better understood when we consider its usage in contemporary Hellenistic to denote the official visit of a king or some other dignitary to a place. Its ordinary Greek sense is ‘presence’, and it is used thus, for instance, in Phil. 2. 12: ‘not as in my presence (parousia) only, but now much more in my absence (apousia)’. Its characteristic New Testament usage, however, has reference to the second advent of Christ, and here it closely follows its idiomatic Hellenistic usage. It denotes, that is to say, the coming to earth of her Sovereign Lord, ‘in power and great glory’. (Other words associated with this event are apokalypsis, ‘revelation’, as in 1 Cor. I. 7, etc., and epiphaneia, ‘manifestation’, as in 1 Tim. 6. 14; once we have the phrase ‘the epiphaneia of His parousia’, 2 Th. 2. 8, that is, ‘the forthshining of His advent’, emphasizing the brilliance or glory of the event.)

     With this Hellenistic use of parousia is closely associated another word, apantēsis, which ordinarily means ‘meeting’, but in Hellenistic Greek ‘seems to have been a kind of technical term for the official welcome of a newly arrived dignitary―a usage which accords excellently with its New Testament usage’. [Moulton and Milligan, Vocabulary of Greek Testament, p. 53.] When some distinguished personage was approaching a town to pay an official visit or parousia, a deputation of the leading citizens went out to meet him and escort him on the final stage of his journey. This sense of the Greek word apantēsis became so regular that it was even used as a technical term in Latin, instead of being replaced by a Latin equivalent. The Roman statesman, Cicero, for example, when writing to his friend, Atticus, inserts the Greek apantēsis more than once in a Latin letter. Referring to Julius Caesar in Italy in 49 B.C., he says: ‘The municipalities are treating him as a god, without dissembling as when they offered prayers for him when he was sick. . . . Just imagine what apantēseis he receives from the towns, what honours are paid him’. [Cicero, Letters to Atticus, viii. 16. 2 (apantēseis is the plural of apantēsis).] Five years later he says much the same thing about Caesar’s adopted son, the future Emperor Augustus: ‘The municipalities are showing remarkable favour to the boy. When he was on his journey to Samnium he came to Cales and stayed at Teanum. Wonderful apantēsis and encouragement! Would you have thought it?’ [Ib. xvi. 11. 6.] A good New Testament example of this use of apantēsis is found in Acts 28. 15. Paul and his companions are approaching Rome, and the Christians in the capital pay him the honours appropriate to a distinguished visitor by sending a deputation out along the Appian Way to meet him and escort him back to Rome: ‘the brethren’, says Luke, ‘when they heard of us, came to meet us (eis apantēsin hēmin) as far as The Market of Appius [forty-three miles from Rome] and The Three Taverns [thirty-three miles from Rome]’. And it is interesting in 1 Thess. 4. 15-17 to find this same phrase eis apantēsin linked with the term parousia. ‘We that are alive’, says Paul, ‘that are left unto the coming (parousia) of the Lord, … shall … be caught up in the clouds, to meet the Lord (eis apantēsin tou kyriou), in the air’. In other words, when Christ returns to pay His royal visit to earth, His people will go forth to welcome Him and form His escort―the thought that Frances Ridley Havergal expresses in a line of one of her hymns: ‘We shall meet thee on thy way’. For while parousia and apantēsis separately need not have this special sense unless the context warrants it, their collocation in this passage strongly supports this interpretation.

     [The same idea is found in Matt. 25. 1. 6, where the ten maidens are said to have gone out to meet the bridegroom and escort him to the wedding feast; in verse 1 the better attested expression is eis hypantēsin, though many authorities have eis apantēsin.]

     Hellenistic Greek marks a stage in the development from classical Greek to Byzantine and modern Greek. And modern Greek as well as classical Greek has a contribution to make to the study of Hellenistic. I once taught a beginners’ class in New Testament Greek, consisting of two students, one of whom had done only classical Greek, while the other had done only modern Greek. It was a most interesting experience. Each of the two commanded a way of approach to New Testament Greek, but the two ways were quite different. The intermediate position of New Testament Greek is evident not only in grammar but also in pronunciation and vocabulary. The pronunciation of modern Greek is vastly different from the pronunciation of Greek in the classical age, and it is probable that that of New Testament Greek was nearer to the modern pronunciation than to that in vogue in Athens in 400 B.C. Sometimes, too, the modern Greek dictionary illumines the New Testament use of certain words.     This is so with the word arrhabōn, used by Paul of the ‘earnest’ or ‘pledge’ which Christians have in the Holy Spirit (2 Cor. I. 22; 5. 5; Eph. I. 14); ‡ one of its meanings in modern Greek is ‘betrothal’ or even ‘engagement ring’, which suggests very clearly the kind of idea that Paul had in mind.

     [‡ The word, appearing in classical Greek with the meaning ‘earnest-money’, ‘caution-money’, ‘deposit’, was borrowed from a Semitic source (probably Phoenician); it is akin to Heb. ‘ĕrābōn, rendered ‘pledge’ in Gen. 38. 17, 18, 20 (cf. the cognate ‘ărubbāh, rendered ‘pledge’ in 1 Sam. 17. 18).]

     And much unnecessary trouble over the weekday on which the crucifixion took place might have been saved if the word paraskeuē (Matt. 27. 62; Mark 15. 42; Luke 23. 54; John 19. 14, 31, 42) had been looked up in a modern Greek dictionary and found to bear the meaning ‘Friday’. It is, in fact, the ordinary word for ‘Friday’ in modern Greek, and it bears the same sense in ecclesiastical Latin, with the spelling parasceve. In the passion narrative it means ‘the day before the sabbath’, and is the equivalent of the Hebrew phrase ērebh shabbāth.

     Although the koin obliterated most of the earlier dialect distinctions in Greek; it was not devoid of dialect distinctions within itself, nor could it have been, for it was a living language. Jerome claimed to find Cilician provincialisms in Paul’s Greek; and while scholars of a bygone day may have exaggerated the extent of what they called ‘Jewish Greek’ in the New Testament, it would indeed be surprising if speakers whose linguistic background (whether more or less remote) was Semitic did not betray in their use of Greek some Semitic turns of thought and modes of speech.

     There is, in fact, a good deal of Semitic idiom in certain parts of the New Testament, and this Semitic idiom takes two clearly differentiated forms. We have on the one hand the influence of the ‘translation-Greek’ of the Septuagint, and on the other hand the influence of the Aramaic vernacular of Palestinian Jews. (Even Paul, though not a Palestinian Jew but brought up in Tarsus, belonged to a family which spoke Aramaic, not Greek, at home.

     [This is probably what Paul means by calling himself ‘a Hebrew of Hebrews’ (Phil. 3. 5)―the Aramaic-speaking son of Aramaic-speaking parents.]

     It was in his original tongue that the heavenly voice addressed him, according to Acts 26. 14.)

     The Septuagint is the name commonly given to the translation of the Old Testament from Hebrew into Greek made by Alexandrian Jews in the third and second centuries B.C., of which we shall have more to say in Chapter XII. This translation was practically the ‘Authorized Version’ of the Bible for Greek speaking Jews (until the end of the first century A.D.) and for Greek-speaking Christians (throughout the whole Christian era). Among Greek-speaking Christians in the early days of Christianity it was as well-known as our Authorized Version is to English-speaking Christians, and exercised a comparable influence on their style. We know, for example, how deeply indebted a writer like John Bunyan was for his prose style to the English Bible. In this case the influence was wholly admirable, for (quite apart from ‘the heavenliness of the matter’) the Authorized Version is written in magnificent English. But the Septuagint was not written in magnificent Greek. The first five books of the Bible had special attention paid to them, and their Greek style is tolerable; but many of the books were translated very indifferently, and the Hebrew idioms were imported bodily into Greek. To one accustomed to reading good Greek, Septuagint Greek reads very oddly; but to a Greek reader acquainted with Hebrew idiom, Septuagint Greek is immediately intelligible. The words are Greek, but the construction is Hebrew. This was the version, then, in which so many early Christians knew the Old Testament, and for those of them who became ‘men of one book’ it influenced their style, Hebrew idioms and all. So, when we find Hebrew idioms in the Greek of the New Testament, we may put it down to the influence of the Septuagint. This is true even in a writer like Luke, who, as we have said, commanded a good, idiomatic Greek style. Even in the English translation it is difficult to miss the transition in style which takes place between the fourth and fifth verses of his Gospel. From the fifth verse of his first chapter to the end of his second chapter we might be reading a continuation of the Old Testament, so reminiscent is the style of his nativity narratives of the characteristic phraseology of the Old Testament. Some scholars have supposed that for these nativity narratives Luke was dependent on a Hebrew document. This is possible―indeed, it seems to the writer more likely―but it is also possible that Luke was simply composing deliberately in ‘Septuagint’ style because he judged that most appropriate for the subject-matter of these two chapters.

     But apart from Hebrew idioms which came into New Testament Greek through the influence of the Septuagint style upon the New Testament writers, we should consider the Septuagint influence upon the New Testament vocabulary. The most important kind of influence exercised by the Septuagint on New Testament Greek is in the meaning of certain theological and ethical terms. The Greek outlook on religion and morals differed from that of the Jews, and the Greek terms were of course devised and used to reflect the Greek outlook. But the Septuagint translators used these terms to represent Hebrew words which reflected the Jewish outlook, and thus gave these Greek terms a new connotation. And it is this new connotation which regularly attaches to these words when they are used in the New Testament. We shall have more to say about this in our chapter on the Septuagint. [See pp. 152 ff.]

     As for the influence of Palestinian Aramaic on the Greek of the New Testament, this is found particularly in the conversations and discourses recorded in the Gospels and the earlier chapters of Acts, and in the book of Revelation. Some scholars have argued that our Gospels were actually written in Aramaic and then turned into Greek.

     [C. F. Burney, The Aramaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel (1922); C. C. Torrey, The Four Gospels (1933), Our Translated Gospels (1936), Documents of the Primitive Church (1941).]

     The evidence, however, is against this. There were no doubt Aramaic summaries of the story of Jesus and collections of His sayings in circulation in the primitive Palestinian Church, but while our Gospels may have drawn upon these, they are not in themselves translations. It is only to be expected, of course, that we should find traces of Aramaic idiom in works which record the sayings of people who spoke in Aramaic and some of which were written by authors whose native tongue was Aramaic. A writer’s native idiom will come out in spite of himself. Dr. Moffatt’s modern version of the Bible has been called ‘the translation of the Bible into Scots’ by some critics because of the Scotticisms which it contains―like the use of ‘factor’ for ‘steward’ in the first parable of Luke 16!

     The study of the Aramaic background of the language of the Gospels and some other parts of the New Testament is an interesting and illuminating one, though it has its limitations and is not, as some imagine, the key to unlock all mysteries.

     These Semitic elements in New Testament Greek―the Hebraisms derived from the Septuagint and the Aramaisms derived from contemporary Palestinian speech―distinguish it from other forms

of vernacular and literary koin: ‘in the vulgar Greek of the Levant there was nothing corresponding to the Semitic flavour of the early Christian writers’. [A. D. Nock, loc. cit.]

     Although Latin was not, except in the Roman army, the language used in the Eastern Empire, the Greek spoken in those parts was not untouched by Latin influence. Indeed, several Latin loanwords made their way even into Rabbinical Hebrew and spoken Aramaic. In New Testament Greek there are several Latin words and a few Latin idioms. The chief Latin borrowings in the vocabulary of New Testament Greek are these”

Gk. assarion (Lat. assarius), ‘farthing’ (better ‘halfpenny’, ‘cent’): Matt. 18. 29; Luke 12. 6.

Gk. dēnarion (Lat. denarius), ‘penny’ (Amer. R.V. better, ‘shilling’): Matt. 18. 28, etc.

Gk. kentyriōn (Lat. centurio), ‘centurion’: Mark 15. 39, 44, 45

Gk. kēnsos (Lat. census), ‘tribute’: Matt. 17. 25; Mark 12. 14, etc.

Gk. kodrantēs (Lat. quadrans), assarion: Matt. 5. 26; Mark 12. 42.

Gk. kolōnia (Lat. colonia), ‘colony’: Acts 16. 12.

Gk. koustōdia (Lat. custodia), `watch': Matt. 27. 65, etc.

Gk. legiōn (Lat. legio), ‘legion’: Matt. 26. 53, etc.

Gk. lention (Lat. linteum), ‘towel’: John 13. 4, 5.

Gk. libertinos (Lat. libertinus), ‘freedman’: Acts 6. 9.

Gk. makellon (Lat. macellum), ‘shambles’: 1 Cor. 10. 25.

Gk. membrana (Lat. membrana), ‘parchment’: 2 Tim. 4. 13.

Gk. milion (Lat. mille [passus]), ‘mile’ (1000 paces): Matt. 5. 41.

Gk. modios (Lat. Modius) ‘bushel’: Matt. 5. 15; Mark 4. 21; Luke 11. 33.

Gk. praitōrion (Lat. prtorium), ‘government house’: Matt. 27. 27, etc.

Gk. sikarios (Lat. sicarius), ‘dagger-man’, ‘assassin’; Acts 21. 38.

Gk. simikinthion (Lat. semicinctium), ‘apron’: Acts 19. 12.

Gk. soudarion (Lat. sudarium), ‘sweat-rag’, ‘napkin’: Luke 19. 20, etc.

Gk. tabernē (Lat. taberna), ‘tavern’: Acts 28. 15.

Gk. titlos (Lat. titulus), ‘title’, ‘inscription’: John 19. 19, 20.

Gk. phailonēs or phelonēs (Lat. pnula), ‘cloak’: 2 Tim. 4. 13.

Gk. phoron (Lat. forum), ‘marketpalce’: Acts 28. 15.

Gk. phragellion (Lat. flagellum), ‘a scourage’: John 2. 15.

Gk. phragelloō (Lat. flagello), ‘to scourge’: Matt. 27l. 26; Mark 15. 15.

The Greek Alphabet.

     Capital          Minuscule     Name of letter      Equivalent          Approximate

                                        in Roman script     Pronounciation

1      A           α           alpha                a          a as in father

2      B           β           bēta                b          b

3      Γ           γ           gamma           g          g as in gas

4      Δ           δ           delta                d          d

5      Ε           ε           epsilon           e          e as in get

6 Z           ζ           zēta                z          dz as in adze

7      H           η           ēta                ē          ea as in bear

8      Ө           θ           thēta                th          th as in thin

9      I           ι           iōta                i               i as in machine

10      K           κ           kappa                k          k

11      Λ           λ           lambda           l               l

12      Μ           μ           mu                m          m

13      N           ν           nu                n          n

14 Ξ           ξ           xi                x          x

15       O           ο           omikron           o          oa as in oak

16      Π           π           pi                p          p

17      P           ρ           rhō                rh          r

18      Σ           σ: final ς      sigma                s          s as in ass

19 T           τ           tau                t               t

20      Υ           υ           upsilon           y,            (modified u)

21      Φ           φ           phi                ph          

22      Χ           χ           khi                ch, kh          ch as in loch     

23      Ψ           ψ           psi                psi          ps

24      Ω           ω           ōmega           ō          oa as in oar

     The sign ‘ over an initial vowel indicates that the word begins with the aspirate sound (h); the sign ᾿ over an initial vowel indicates that there is no aspirate sound. These signs are called the rough breathing and the smooth breathing respectively. Every initial vowel carries either the one or the other. Initial υ (upsilon) always carries the rough breathing: so also does initial ρ (rhō), probably indicating a pronunciation like that of Welsh rh in Rhyl.

Chapter 6―The Two Testaments

     If someone who was previously quite unacquainted with the Bible were suddenly introduced to an ordinary copy of the English Bible and looked rapidly through it in an attempt to size up its character and contents, he would soon discover that it falls into two unequal parts, called respectively ‘The Old Testament’ and ‘The New Testament’. But he might be at a loss to discover just why these two parts are called ‘Testaments’. The natural sense in which we use the word ‘testament’ in English is when we refer to someone’s ‘last will and testament’; but there is not much about the two parts of the Bible that bears any relation to 'testament' in this sense. It is, in fact, unfortunate that the word ‘testament’ was ever applied to the two parts into which the Bible is divided, especially as there is a much more suitable English word which might be used, and a perfectly familiar word at that―the word ‘covenant’.

     We have derived the English word ‘testament’ from Latin testamentum, which also has the sense of a ‘last will and testament’. In the standard Latin version of the Bible, the two parts are called respectively Vetus Testamentum and Novum Testamentum. This word testamentum was chosen as a translation of the Greek word diathēkē, which is similarly used in copies of the Greek Bible, where Part I is called hē palaia diathēkē (the old diathēkē) and Part II is called hē kainē diathēkē (the new diathēkē). So we have to consider this Greek word diathēkē. It is, we discover, a word which can bear more meanings than one. It may mean `testament' (in the sense of ‘last will and testament’), but it may also mean ‘covenant’. It is used frequently in the Greek Bible―both in the Greek (Septuagint) translation of the Old Testament and in the original Greek of the New Testament―and its regular Biblical meaning is ‘covenant’. There was, indeed, another Greek word, synthēkē, which the Septuagint translators might have used to render the Hebrew word for ‘covenant’ (bĕrīth); but they avoided it, because it might have suggested that a covenant between God and men was concluded as an agreement between equals, whereas diathēkē is better suited to the Biblical idea of a covenant or ‘settlement’ which God initiates by His saving grace and freely bestows upon His people.

     In the Authorized Version, unfortunately, diathēkē is often translated ‘testament’ in the New Testament, but this has the effect of obscuring its real force. For example, in Heb. 9. 20 the Authorized Version says that when Moses had delivered the original summary of the law to Israel he sacrificed various animals and sprinkled their blood and said: ‘this is the blood of the testament which God hath enjoined unto you’. But of course, Moses said something very different, as we can see even in the Authorized Version by turning up the passage quoted, Exod. 24. 8, where we are told that Moses said: ‘Behold the blood of the covenant, which the LORD hath made with you concerning all these words’. The fault does not lie with the writer to the Hebrews, who used the Greek word diathēkē quite properly in its sense of ‘covenant’ (as he found it used in the Greek Septuagint version of Exod. 24. 8); the mistake lies with the English translation ‘testament’, following the Latin translation testamentum.

     [The Revised Version regularly gives ‘covenant’ for diathēkē in the New Testament. But in Heb. 9. 16, 17, in spite of using ‘covenant’ elsewhere in the same passage, both before and after, the Revisers felt themselves compelled to use ‘testament’; For where a testament is, there must of necessity be the death of him that made it. For a testament is of force where there hath been death; for doth it ever avail while he that made it liveth?’ This sudden change of translation breaks the sequence of the argument most awkwardly. In these two verses, too, diathēkē means ‘covenant’; the death referred to, as the context indicates, is best understood as the death of the covenant-victim, the shedding and sprinkling of whose blood sealed and ratified the covenant. In the New Covenant, of course, the covenant-victim is the Author of the covenant Himself.]

     In the earlier days of Latin-speaking Christianity, indeed, another word than testamentum was frequently used to represent Greek diathēkē. This was the Latin word instrumentum, which in this connection was much more suitable.     If the use of instrumentum had prevailed, and its English derivative ‘instrument’ had been employed in the titles of the two parts of the Bible, it would have been more satisfactory, for ‘instrument’ can be used in the sense of ‘agreement’. So far as English is concerned, however, ‘covenant’ is an even better word than ‘instrument’, for ‘covenant’ is a perfectly well-known word meaning a particularly solemn and binding form of agreement. Indeed, the special Bible sense of ‘covenant’ goes still farther: it conveys the idea of mutual ‘belonging’, of incorporation into the family, of a marriage-bond , * solemnly ratified by the shedding of blood (whence the Hebrew term for making a covenant literally means ‘cutting a covenant’).

     [* The idea of the covenant as a marriage-union between God and His people is specially emphasized in the Book of Hosea.]

     We may, therefore, replace the word ‘Testament’ by the word ‘Covenant’ in the titles of the two parts of the bible, and call them respectively, ‘The books of the Old Covenant,’ and ‘The Books of the New Covenant’. If we think of the Bible as comprising these two collections, we shall be well on our way to understanding what the Bible is and what it contains.

     To take the second and smaller collection first: in what sense may we call the New Testament books ‘The Books of the New Covenant’? What is this ‘New Covenant’? For the answer to that we must remind ourselves of the solemn act performed by Jesus in the Upper Room at Jerusalem on the evening before His death. We remember how He instituted the Holy Communion, in which, after giving His disciples bread as the token of His body, He gave them the cup of wine, saying: ‘This is my blood of the (new) covenant, which is shed for many’.

     [Mark 14. 24. Here, as in Matt. 26. 28, R.V. omits ‘new’ in the text but supplies it in the margin. In any case, it is implied if not expressed. Matt. 26. 28 adds ‘unto remission of sins’ after ‘many’. Luke 22. 20 reads: ‘This cup is the new covenant in my blood, even that which is poured out for you.’ But some early authorities omit Luke 22. 19 after ‘This is my body’ and the whole of verse 20. The earliest written account of the Institution is in 1 Cor. 11. 23-25; here the words spoken over the cup (verse 25) are: ‘This cup is the new covenant in my blood: this do, as oft as ye drink it, in remembrance of Me.’]

     To one who remembers the Old Testament background, the significance of these words is immediately evident. As we have just mentioned, it was Moses, who, when he gave the law to the people of Israel, offered sacrificial victims and sprinkled their blood, saying: ‘This is the blood of the covenant which the LORD hath made with you’. By that act and these words Moses, acting as mediator, solemnized the covenant between Jehovah and Israel, by which He undertook to be their God and they promised to be His people. Now Jesus takes upon His lips words reminiscent of those used by Moses so long before, and, acting as Mediator, inaugurates a new covenant between God and men, a covenant to be ratified by the blood of no ordinary sacrificial victims, but by His own:

               A sacrifice of nobler name

                         And richer blood than they.

     But why was a new covenant necessary? Why did not the Mosaic covenant remain in force?

Because the Mosaic covenant was defective. It was an undertaking solemnly entered into by Jehovah and Israel; its continued validity depended upon both sides honouring their agreement. There was no doubt about this on Jehovah’s part, of course; but what about the people? They intended to keep the covenant, it is true. When they listened to Moses reading the divine law, ‘the book of the covenant’, they said: ‘All that the LORD hath spoken will we do, and be obedient’ (Exod. 24. 7). But, when they were put to the test, they found it difficult, and indeed, impossible, to keep their agreement. There lay the defect. But although the people of Israel failed to keep their side of the covenant, the God of Israel continued to keep His. And the first covenant, inadequate though it was, was used by Him to prepare the way for another covenant which should replace the first and succeed where it failed.     So we go on to the time of Jeremiah, roughly midway between Moses and Jesus, and hear him announcing the purpose of God:

     “Behold, the days come, saith the LORD, that I will make a new covenant with the house of Israel, and with the house of Judah: not according to the covenant that I made with their fathers in the day that I took them by the hand to bring them out of the land of Egypt; which my covenant they brake, although I was an husband unto them, saith the LORD. But this is the covenant that I will make with the house of Israel after those days, saith the LORD; I will put my law in their inward parts, and in their heart will I write it; and I will be their God, and they shall be my people: and they shall teach no more every man his neighbour, and every man his brother, saying, Know the LORD: for they shall all know me, from the least of them unto the greatest of them, saith the LORD: for I will forgive their iniquity, and their sin will I remember no more” (Jet. 31. 31-34).]

     The significance of our Lord’s words, then, is that in Him the new covenant, predicted by Jeremiah, became effective. The implications of His inaugurating the new covenant to take the place of the old are drawn out in particular by the writer to the Hebrews in the eighth and ninth chapters of his epistle. The same teaching is emphasized, though in different language, by the Apostle Paul when he describes how the purpose of the sacrifice of Christ was ‘that the ordinance of the law might be fulfilled in us, who walk not after the flesh, but after the spirit’ (Rom. 8. 4). For the superiority of the New Covenant lies partly in this, that those who enter into it receive into their own lives the life of Christ and the power of the Holy Spirit, a life which knows and desires the will of God and a power which is able to do it.

     The books of the Old Covenant, then, tell how God made the necessary preparation for the sending of His Son to inaugurate the New Covenant. The books of the New Covenant tell how He came to do this and set forth the implications of this New Covenant. Both collections alike speak of Christ; it is He who gives unity to each and to both together. The former collection looks forward with hope to His appearance and work; the latter tells how that hope was fulfilled.

     The books of the Old Covenant open with a summary of the early days of men in Western Asia which forms an introduction to the story of Israel, the people whom God chose for Himself and

with whom He entered into covenant-relationship. God’s choice of Israel was no act of favouritism―He is no respecter of persons (or of nations, either)―but He selected this particular nation in order that the knowledge of Himself and of His will, revealed to them, might be communicated by them to other nations; and He chose them most of all in order that they might be prepared as the nation in which, when God’s time was ready, the Saviour of the world might be born.

     The history of this preparation is the chief concern of the books of the Old Covenant. God prepared this nation to be the vehicle of His purpose by revealing Himself to them in mighty works and by the words of His spokesmen the prophets. Throughout this period prophets and righteous men in Israel looked forward to the accomplishment of God’s purpose in the promotion of which they played their allotted parts, and they ‘died in faith, not having received the promises, but having seen them and greeted them from afar’ (Heb. 11. 13). The promise was carried out and the period of fulfillment dawned when Christ came. So He could say to His disciples: ‘Blessed are your eyes, for they see; and your ears, for they hear. For verily I say unto you, that many prophets and righteous men desired to see the things which ye see, and saw them not; and to hear the things which ye hear, and heard them not’ (Matt. 13. 16, 17).

     [The parallel passage in Luke (10. 23, 24) has ‘prophets and kings’ instead of ‘prophets and righteous men.’]

     The books of the New Covenant tell how the divinely-implanted hopes and aspirations of these ancient men of God were realized in Christ.

     A question which naturally arises here is this.

     Since the New Covenant fulfilled and, indeed, superseded the Old, and since we now have in our hands the books of the New Covenant, why should we trouble any more about the books of the Old Covenant? Does not the New Testament render the Old obsolete? As it introduces a covenant of grace and not a covenant of works, does it not, indeed, contradict the Old Testament? Why, then, does the Christian Church continue to include the Old Testament among her sacred books?

     The general belief of the Christian Church is expressed in the opening words of Article VII (in the Thirty-Nine Articles of Religion of the Church of England):

     “The Old Testament is not contrary to the New; for both in the Old and New Testament everlasting life is offered to mankind by Christ, who is the only Mediator between God and Man, being both God and Man. Wherefore they are not to be heard, which feign that the old Fathers did look only for transitory promises . . .”

     From time to time, however, men have risen in the Church to argue that the Old Testament is so thoroughly superseded by the New that it should no longer be ranked among the canonical writings of the Church.

     One of the earliest of these was Marcion, who flourished in the second century A.D. Marcion, a native of Sinope in Asia Minor, came to Rome about A.D. 140, and there founded a sect which persisted for many years. His distinctive doctrine was that the Old Testament was inferior to the New and had been rendered obsolete by Christ. Marcion stressed the contrast between the two Testaments so far as to say that the God revealed in the one was quite a different being from the God revealed in the other. The righteous God, the Creator, Israel’s Jehovah, revealed in the Old Testament, was a different and inferior deity to the good God revealed by Jesus under the name ‘Father’. This, Marcion thought, was rendered sufficiently obvious by the fact that it was the worshippers of the righteous God of the Old Testament who sent the Revealer of the good God to His death. Marcion, therefore, repudiated the authority of the Old Testament, and defined the Christian canon as consisting of one Gospel and a collection of ten Pauline epistles. (We shall have more to say about Marcion’s canon in Chapter VIII.) Paul, to Marcion’s way of thinking, was the only real Apostle of Christ, who had remained true to His mind and revelation. The Church, as a whole, he maintained, had followed in the error of the Judaizers, among whom the original Apostles of Christ were to be reckoned―Peter, John and the rest. Marcion stated his view of the opposition between the two Testaments in a work called the Antitheses, where he collected a number of contrasts between the revelation of the Old Testament and that of the New.

     Marcion’s dualism between the righteous God and the good God has often been reproduced, though not usually in such a thorough-going form. We still find people drawing a contrast between the God of the Old Testament and the God of the New, although they do not, like Marcion, regard the God of the Old Testament as having an independent existence, but regard Him as a developing idea in the minds of His worshippers, which reached full growth when it attained the measure of the stature of the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ. Others make the contrast between the attributes of God―His righteousness and His mercy―as though the former were characteristic of the Old Testament revelation and the latter of the New Testament revelation, whereas in fact both coexist in harmony throughout the whole Bible.

     One illustrious Marcionite of comparatively recent times was the great German church historian Adolf von Harnack, who was himself no mean authority on Marcion. ‘The rejection of the Old Testament in the second century,’ said Harnack, ‘was a mistake which the Great church rightly refused to make; the retention of it in the sixteenth century was a fate which the Reformation was not yet able to avoid; but the Protestantism since the nineteenth century should continue to treasure it as a canonical document is the result of a paralysis which affects both religion and the Church’. [Marcion (1921), p. 217.]

     Practical difficulties in the use of the Old Testament arise in various places and times, but these difficulties are to be surmounted by further teaching about he preparatory character of the Old Testament revelation, not burked by throwing the Old Testament overboard. Gibbon [Decline and Fall fo the Roman Empire, chap. 37. (Chandos Classics edition, Vol. II, p. 516.)] reports that when Ulfilas, the apostle to the Goths, translated the Bible into the gothic language about A.D. 360, ‘he prudently suppressed the four books of Kings, ** as they might tend to irritate the fierce and sanguinary spirit of the Barbarians’.

     [** The ‘four books of Kings’ are those which we know as 1 and 2 Samuel and 1 and 2 Kings. If the motive ascribed by Gibbon to Ulfilas is the true one, why did he not suppress Joshua and Judges as well?]

     Whether this was so or not, we are told that similar difficulties arise in Africa, where converts to Christianity find in the Old Testament too much that reminds them of their ancestral practices and beliefs―too much, for example, to confirm them in their polygamous customs. How far this representation is exaggerated can be ascertained from missionaries.

     On the other hand, the contrary difficulty is experienced in India, one hears, where the Old Testament is uncongenial to the intellectual heritage of educated Hindus. Hindu thought is abstract,

impersonal and static, whereas the Old Testament outlook is concrete, personal and dynamic. The Indian sometimes says that the Old Testament reflects a morality and a conception of God which is lower than that of the best Indian religion, and asks why the ancient literature of his own people should not play for him the role of Gospel-preparation which the Old Testament plays for others. A cursory comparison of even the earliest and purest literary monuments of Indian religion with the Old Testament may well fill one with surprise that such an idea could ever be entertained; but it certainly has been and still is entertained, and not by Indians only. Perhaps it all depends on what one means by ‘morality’ and ‘religion’.

     The sect of ‘German Christians’ which flourished in Germany under the Hitler regime urged a similar argument. Why should Nordic Christians cherish a volume of Jewish religion and history when they had the sagas and beliefs of their own pre-Christian ancestors? These latter should serve as the proper introduction to ‘German Christianity’ as they understood it, instead of the Hebrew Scriptures. An adapted edition of the book of Psalms appeared in these circles during the thirties of the present century, entitled Divine Songs for Germans, where the historical and personal references in the Psalms were replaced by others drawn from Germanic and Indo-European history and mythology: for example, the place-names of Psa. 87 were replaced by the geographical landmarks of Indo-European migrations from the Ganges to Scandinavia.

     In the early days of the Church difficulties were felt in connection with the Old Testament even among those who repudiated Marcionism and maintained the apostolic faith. The Greek Fathers, especially those of Alexandria, found the concrete realism of the Old Testament uncongenial to their heritage of Greek philosophic thought, and they had large recourse to the method of allegorization. In this they had a predecessor in the Jewish scholar, Philo of Alexandria (c. 20 B.C.-A.D. 50), who himself followed the pagan scholars who applied similar methods to the poems of Homer and Greek mythology in general. The allegorical treatment was carried to absurd lengths, but the Alexandrian Fathers held, as some Christians do even today, that where the literal sense is plainly impossible (that is to say, impossible in their eyes), the text must be interpreted allegorically. The fact of the matter is that very little indeed of the Old Testament was originally intended to be understood allegorically.

     The fact that books are still published professing to deal with Moral Difficulties of the Old Testament suggests that some readers even today find difficulties in the acceptance of the Old Testament as part of the Church’s canon.

     Yet we must ever bear in mind that the Old Testament was the Bible of our Lord and His Apostles, and its authority was fully acknowledged by them.

     That some of its provisions were of the nature of a temporary accommodation was recognized; Jesus, for example, said that the provision which the Mosaic law made for divorce and remarriage was introduced because of the people’s ‘hardness of heart’; but it was from the Old Testament that he took the fundamental and abiding principle in the light of which the Mosaic provision was seen in its true character. ‘Have ye not read, that He which made them from the beginning made them male and female, and said, For this cause shall a man leave his father and mother, and shall cleave to his wife; and the twain shall become one flesh? So that they are no more twain, but one flesh. What therefore God hath joined together, let not man put asunder.... Moses for your hardness of heart suffered you to put away your wives: but from the beginning it hath not been so’ (Matt. 19. 4-8).

     The Old and New Testaments, in fact, cannot be dissociated; while on the one hand we cannot understand the preparatory revelation of the Old apart from its fulfillment in the New, it is also true, on the other hand, that we cannot understand the New apart from the Old.     The Old Testament is to the New as the root is to the fruit. It is a grave mistake to think that the fruit of the Spirit in Christianity will grow and ripen better if the plant is severed from its roots in the Old Covenant.

     A few years ago Professor A. M. Hunter wrote an excellent little book called The Unity of the New Testament. He found the unity of the New Testament to lie in its presentation of the history of salvation, a history which is like a cord made up of three strands―the Bringer of salvation; the way of salvation; the saved people. We might say very much the same thing in terms of the covenant-idea if we speak of the three strands as being: the Mediator of the covenant; the basis of the covenant; the covenant-people. In the New Testament, of course, the Bringer of salvation or the Mediator of the Covenant is our Lord Jesus Christ; the way of salvation or the basis of the covenant is ‘by grace alone through faith alone’; the heirs of salvation or the covenant-people are the Church. But what Professor Hunter says of the New Testament is equally true of the Bible (as he would be the first to agree).     The Bible―Old Testament and New Testament together―has a unity of its own; and that unity is to be found in the fact that the Bible tells the story of salvation―the story of God’s covenant-mercy. That is just what the Bible is.

     It is the record of God’s revelation of Himself as a righteous God and a Saviour.

     This record has a threefold theme. As for the first strand, it is God Himself who is the Saviour of His people; it is He who keeps covenant and mercy for ever. All through the Old Testament He points His people forward to a day when He will vindicate His character, establish His covenant, set up His kingdom, and bring near His salvation. We turn the page into the New Testament, and find Him doing just this, in the person of Jesus Christ His Son.

     This Bringer of salvation, the Son of God, does not appear suddenly in the New Testament as a visitant on earth from another realm, having no connection with the course of prior events down here. As touching His eternal relationship with the Father, He is ‘without genealogy, having neither beginning of days nor end of life’; but as touching His Manhood, He is indissolubly bound up with all previous history. Marcion, in editing Luke’s Gospel to make it a suitable Gospel for his Canon, cut out the genealogy of Christ which we find in Luke 3. 23-38; but the genealogy is there of right, as is also the companion genealogy in the first chapter of Matthew’s Gospel. In Matthew, Christ is introduced as a true son of Abraham and heir to the throne of David; in Luke, He appears as a true son of man, the Saviour of mankind. But both genealogies emphasize the link binding Christ and the New Covenant to the age of the Old Covenant. The genealogy of Christ is the culmination and explanation of the many genealogies which almost seem to form the skeleton round which Old Testament history is built up. The words of Mr. Robert Rendall express this truth illuminatingly:

     “It is in retrospect from Christ that the common genealogies reveal their primary spiritual value. When being written, the exact course and issue of the divine purpose could not have been foreseen. True, here and there, a particular branch was singled out for special notice, and, as time passed, a main interest developed, but in general no one could say certainly from which line the Messiah would come. The documents were a plain straightforward transcription of genealogical data: it was only afterwards that God’s action therein began to be seen. Thus the genealogy of Christ was not isolated as such from the common genealogical tables, but was embedded in the general register of names. This accounts for the seeming irrelevance of a large mass of names in these genealogies, and proves beyond question that the Messianic element is there, not through human foresight, but through a dispensation of divine providence. This hidden development in the long succession of Hebrew generations is that from which Old Testament history derives its substance and completeness”. [The Evangelical Quarterly, October, 1946, p. 258.]

     This means that the Saviour is bound up with His people―bone of their bone and flesh of their flesh. So we may take this strand next in the history of salvation―the people of God, the elect community―as one which runs through the whole Bible. This continuity is obscured for us in the English Bible because it uses for this community in the New Testament a word which it does not use in the Old Testament―the word ‘church’. But in the Bible of the early Christians―the Greek Bible―the continuity was plain, for the Greek New Testament word ekklēsia, which is translated ‘church’ in the English Bible, is also used in the Greek (Septuagint) translation of the Old Testament to denote Israel as the community (‘assembly’ or ‘congregation’) of Jehovah. Indeed, we find it used twice in this sense in the New Testament: in Stephen’s speech in Acts 7. 38, where he says that Moses ‘was with the church in the wilderness’ (where the whole people of Israel is meant), and in a quotation from Psa. 22. 22 in Heb. 2. 12: ‘in the midst of the church will I sing praise unto Thee’ (where a particular local community of Israelites appears to be meant).

     [In these two New Testament passages A. V. uses ‘church’; R. V. has ‘church’ in Acts 7. 38 (‘congregation’ in margin), and ‘congregation’ in Heb. 2. 12 (‘church’ in margin): the word in both cases is Greek ekklēsia.]

     The Christian Church was, of course, a new beginning: Christ used the future tense when He said: ‘upon this rock I will build My church’ (Matt. 16. 18). But the very word that He used for His new community (ekklēsia) pointed to its connection with the ekklēsia of Old Testament times.

     [This is true no matter what language our Lord was speaking on the occasion. Probably He used the Aramaic term kĕnishtā.]

     For He Himself forms the organic link between the two and embodies the continuity of both. He is the Messiah-Saviour to whom the old community―the ancient covenant-people―looked forward; He is Saviour and head over all things to His Church―the new covenant-people. He belongs to both and both belong to Him, and in Him they are not two but one. Abraham had the Gospel proclaimed to him [Gal. 3. 8.] and is the spiritual father of all believers; [Rom. 4. 16 ff.] Moses esteemed the reproach of Christ greater riches than the treasures in Egypt. [Heb. 11. 26.] Of these and all other believers under the Old Covenant it is written that ‘these all, having had witness borne to them through their faith, received not the promise, God having provided some better thing concerning us, that apart from us they should not be made perfect’. [Heb. 11. 39, 40.] The first followers of Christ were at one and the same time the last believing remnant of the old community and the first believing nucleus of the new. The New Jerusalem has the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel written on its gates and the names of ‘the twelve apostles of the Lamb’ inscribed on the foundation-stones of its wall. [Rev. 21. 12, 14.] Neither in the Old Testament nor in the New is solitary salvation envisaged: the salvation of God is enjoyed in the membership of the saved community.

     When we consider the third strand, the way of salvation, too, is a theme common to both Testaments. In both salvation results from the exercise of God’s free electing love. God chose Abraham that he might be the father of many nations, that through his seed blessing might be brought to all the families of the earth.

     He set His love on Abraham’s descendants when they were slaves in the land of Egypt and wrought their deliverance that they might come to know Him as their God and spread that knowledge to others. And the New Testament believers are taught to regard themselves as having been chosen in Christ before the world’s foundation that they should be holy and blameless before Him. It is of grace alone, that it might be of faith alone. Abraham believed God, and it was reckoned to him for righteousness, and thus he became the father of all who by similar faith receive God’s righteousness. The covenant at Sinai might be a covenant of works so far as Israel’s undertaking was concerned; but it was a covenant of grace so far as God’s fulfilling it was concerned, for He continued to treat Israel as His people even when Israel forgot that He was their God. Paul’s insistence on justification by faith is no innovation in Biblical doctrine; he turns to the Old Testament to confirm and illustrate it. In the New Testament the focus of our faith and the declaration of God’s grace is the self-offering of Christ upon the cross; but when Christ Himself wished to make plain the significance of His death He did so in language drawn from the Old Testament―in particular from the picture of the obedient Servant of Jehovah, in Isa. 53, whose suffering is endured for the sake of others, whose sin He bears Himself. ‘The Son of man came not to be ministered unto, but to minister, and to give His life a ransom for many’ (Mark10. 45).

     Apart from the organic unity of the Old Testament with the New, which makes it an indispensable part of the Christian canon, the Old Testament makes in various ways its own distinctive contribution to the volume of revelation.

     The supreme religious value of the Old Testament is the way in which it presents God as the Living God, One who is dynamically alive and active in self-revelation, not simply the Prime Mover or Pure Activity of certain schools of philosophy, nor yet merely the Self-existent Being. He is that, of course, but He is much more. He is the God of Creation, Providence, and Redemption; He is the God who makes Himself known in the mighty acts with which He breaks into the course of history. And this picture of God in the Old Testament prepares us for the supremely redemptive mighty act which He wrought in sending His son into the world for our deliverance and in raising Him from the dead. The God of the Old Testament is not aloof from the world, which He created and maintains; He is not disinterested in His creatures, but satisfies their need. Nor is He partial; He has no ‘respect of persons’. The nation to which He reveals Himself and with which He enters into covenant-relationship cannot presume on that privilege; if it abuses His goodness, His judgment is all the more severe on it just because it is peculiarly His nation. ‘You only have I known of all the families of the earth: therefore I will visit upon you all your iniquities’ (Amos . 2). True, His providence is not restricted to Israel: He brought up the Syrains from Kir in the desert and the Philistines from Crete just as He had brought up the Israelites from Egypt, but He had not revealed Himself to those others as He had to Israel, and therefore they are more responsible than the Syrians and Philistines. How different this God is from such a nature-deity as Chemosh, the god of the Moabites! Chemosh had no independent existence; his fortunes rose and fell with the fortunes of Moab, and when Moab disappeared, so did Chemosh. Unlike Chemosh and all gods of that order, Jehovah is the living God, who freely chooses His people and makes ethical demands on them; He is ‘a God with a character’, and that character of holiness and truth, righteousness and mercy, He desires to see reproduced in His people.

     This brings us to the ethical value of the Old Testament. The Old Testament is introduced by the Books of the Law, in which the holy requirements of God’s will are made known. ‘The law’, says Paul, ‘was our custodian until Christ came’ (Gal. 3. 24, R.S.V.). The law is the preparation for the Gospel; the Gospel offers forgiveness of sins, but the law makes us conscious of our sinfulness and of our need for forgiveness. Above the religions of the nations which surrounded Israel the Old Testament revelation towers high in its insistence that God, who is Himself holy, requires holiness in His people. ‘Ye shall be holy: for I, Jehovah your God, am holy’ (Lev. 19. 2; cf. 1 Peter 1. 16). Thus we are prepared for the supreme demand made by Christ in the Sermon on the Mount: ‘Ye therefore shall be perfect, as your heavenly Father is perfect’ (Matt. 5. 48). And if, in face of such an uncompromising ethic, we feel utterly unable even to begin to attain it, we are ready to hear the Gospel note: ‘What the law could not do ... God has done, by sending His own Son in the likeness of sinful flesh and as an offering for sin, . . . in order that the law’s righteous requirement might be fulfilled in us who do not order our lives according to the flesh but according to the Spirit’ (Rom. 8. 3, 4, free translation).

     And the Old Testament is distinctive in its presentation of the historical process. This process is not illusion, as it is to Indian thought; it is not an indefinite series of cycles repeating themselves,

as some Greek schools thought; it is the steady unfolding of God’s one increasing purpose. We have to await the New Testament record of the coming of Christ to see the consummation of that purpose in Him, but the broad view of its outworking is found in the Old Testament. The Old Testament writers had a philosophy of history long before Herodotus, who among secular historians is rightly hailed as the father of history. They were not mere annalists, as their contemporaries in Egypt and Assyria were for the most part; they selected and presented the facts which they recorded in accordance with a guiding principle which we find fully embodied in Christ. The Old Testament has been compared by Dr. Emil Brunner to the first part of a sentence and the New Testament to its second and concluding part. This comparison is all the more forceful if we think of a complex sentence in Dr. Brunner’s native German tongue, where the sense of the whole cannot be comprehended until the last word is spoken.     So God, to the fathers through the prophets, spoke the first part of His salvation-bringing sentence; but the last word, completely revealing and redeeming, was spoken in His Son.

     That is why the Old Testament prophets did not know clearly the full import of their words: they ‘searched and inquired about this salvation; they inquired what person or time was indicated by the Spirit of Christ within them when predicting the sufferings of Christ and the subsequent glory’ (1 Peter 2. 10, 11, R.S.V.). But the apostles, in whose days Christ Himself came, had no such questionings: taught by their Master, they knew that He was the One of whom Moses and the prophets had spoken, and that it was to their own days that those men of old had looked forward. ‘This is that which was spoken by the prophet’, Peter claimed when interpreting the strange events of the first Christian Pentecost. For Christ was the key to the problem and the answer to the questionings of the prophets.     The New Testament, as Augustine declared, lies hidden in the Old; the Old Testament is revealed in the New.

Chapter 7―The Form of the Bible

     We have already discussed the main feature of the structure of the Bible―its division into the books of the Old Covenant and the books of the New Covenant. We are now to look more particularly at the way in which these two bodies of covenant-literature are built up.

     The Bible, at first sight, appears to be a collection of literature―mainly Jewish. If we enquire into the circumstances under which the various Biblical documents were written, we find that they were written at intervals over a space of nearly 1500 years. The writers wrote in various lands, from Italy in the west to Mesopotamia and possibly Persia in the east. The writers themselves were a heterogeneous number of people, not only separated from each other by hundreds of years and hundreds of miles, but belonging to the most diverse walks of life. In their ranks we have kings, herdsmen, soldiers, legislators, fishermen, statesmen, courtiers, priests and prophets, a tent-making Rabbi and a Gentile physician, not to speak of others of whom we know nothing apart from the writings they have left us. The writings themselves belong to a great variety of literary types. They include history, law (civil, criminal, ethical, ritual, sanitary), religious poetry, didactic treatises, lyric poetry, parable and allegory, biography, personal correspondence, personal memoirs and diaries, in addition to the distinctively Biblical types of prophecy and apocalyptic.

     For all that, the Bible is not simply an anthology; there is a unity which binds the whole together. An anthology is compiled by an anthologist, but no anthologist compiled the Bible. Somehow or other it grew in the course of these many centuries until at length it attained full stature as the Bible which we know.     And it grew under the hand of Him who makes all living things grow, ‘the Holy Spirit, the Lord and giver of life, who spake by the prophets’. The unifying principle which makes the Bible a living whole has already been pointed out: it is Christ Himself, the Bringer of salvation. The Holy Scriptures in their entirety were given to make us wise unto salvation through faith in Him and to teach us how, in the divine fellowship which links all the heirs of salvation together in Christ, we ought to direct our ways according to the will of God.

     Any part of the human body can only be properly explained in reference to the whole body. And any part of the Bible can only be properly explained in reference to the whole Bible. We have mentioned the genealogies of the Bible in the previous chapter. [See p. 82.] The first nine chapters of 1 Chronicles, for example, are full of genealogies and similar lists. Take these chapters by themselves, out of their context in the continuous history of salvation, and what have we? Little more than genealogies and similar lists―the sort of thing that can be paralleled from any secular record-office. We shall not understand why these chapters are in the Bible if we look at them in isolation. But as part of the whole Bible they have a definite and valuable function. They may not make us wise unto salvation in the way that Isaiah 53 can; but it would be a strange body all of whose members discharged the same functions. The genealogies of 2 Chronicles, as has already been indicated, are part of the story which leads up to Christ, part of the context in which the divine revelation is given; Christ is their goal as He is the goal of all the Old Testament.

     But now let us look at the structure of the Bible, taking each of its two component parts separately.

(I) The Old Testament

     The Old Testament as we know it in our ordinary editions of the English Bible falls into four sections: (1) the Pentateuch, or five books of Moses (Genesis to Deuteronomy); (2) the historical books (Joshua to Esther); (3) five books of poetry and ethics (Job to the Song of Songs); (4) the books of the prophets (Isaiah to Malachi). One of the books in the last group, the Book of Lamentations, might have been included in the third group, so far as its literary type is concerned, but as it is concerned with the fall of Jerusalem in 587 B.C., it is appended to the Book of Jeremiah, who lived and prophesied at that time. (The tradition that Jeremiah was the author of Lamentations is not supported by the contents of the book.)

     One thing that strikes us as we consider this division of the Old Testament is the important part which is devoted to history. Not only are there the books properly called historical, but the Law in the Pentateuch is also set in an historical framework. In fact, from the beginning of Genesis to the end of 2 Kings we have a continuous history from Adam down to the middle of the Babylonian captivity (562 B. C.). This is followed by another historical corpus, Chronicles-Ezra-Nehemiah, which covers the same ground, and carries the narrative on to the period following the return from the Babylonian captivity, although it covers the period from Adam to David only in the skeleton-form of genealogies (1 Chron. 1-9).

     [The book of Esther, the one remaining historical book of the Old Testament, belongs to neither of these groups.]

     Whereas the former group of historical books looks at the history from what may be called a prophetic point of view, the latter group looks at it from a more ‘institutional’ point of view, with a dominant interest in the rise and progress of the worship at the Temple in Jerusalem.

     [This is only a rough distinction; it is noteworthy that while the author of 1 and 2 Kings judges the kings of Judah largely by an ‘institutional’ test (their attitude to the local worship at the ‘high places’), the Chronicler judges them largely by their response to prophetic messages.]

     Both the prophetic and institutional elements were essential and complementary in the religion of Israel.

     There is, however, nothing surprising in the amount of history contained in the Old Testament when we reflect that the God of the Bible is the God who reveals Himself in history, both by the general overruling providence which He exercises as Lord of history, and the mighty works by which He breaks into the historical process, such as the redemption of Israel from Egypt and the greater redemption wrought in Christ for all mankind.

     This arrangement of the books of the Old Testament is one that the English Bible has taken over from the Latin Vulgate version, and the Latin Vulgate in turn took it over from the Greek Septuagint translation, which belongs to the third and second centuries B.C. The early copies of the Septuagint do not agree altogether in the arrangement of the books; sometimes the poetical and ethical books are put after the prophets instead of before them, and there are variations in the arrangement of individual books. But they do present thus fourfold arrangement of Pentateuch, Historical Books, Poetical and Ethical Books, and Prophetical Books; and in particular, Chronicles-Ezra-Nehemiah regularly take their place immediately after the books of Kings (in the Septuagint, followed by the Vulgate, the two books of Samuel and two of Kings are called the four books of the Kingdoms).

     [The presence of the Apocryphal books in the Septuagint and Vulgate is not discussed here, but is left over to Chapter XIII.]

     The Septuagint arrangement may not have been new; it was possibly one of the arrangements current among the Jews at the time, but it was not the arrangement which prevailed among the Jews of Palestine and Babylonia, where the Hebrew Bible was preserved and edited. In some respects the Septuagint arrangement reflects the chronological order of certain books better than the arrangement which prevailed in the Hebrew Bible does; for example, Chronicles-Ezra-Nehemiah is the chronological order and not Ezra-Nehemiah-Chronicles, which we find in the Hebrew Bible. The book of Daniel is not included among the prophetical Books of the Hebrew Bible, but in the Septuagint it appears as fourth of the Major Prophets (Isaiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, Daniel), and this has led some writers to suggest that it may have originally been reckoned among the Prophets and only later removed to another section of the Hebrew Bible.

     What, then, is this arrangement of the Hebrew Bible which differs so much from the arrangement which has come down to us from the Septuagint? It is a threefold arrangement. The three parts of the Hebrew Bible are the Tōrāh (Law), the Nĕbhī’ īm (Prophets), and the Kĕthūbhīm (Writings). The various books are divided between these three groups as follows:

     1. Tōrāh (Law): Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, Deuteronomy.

     [These names of the first five books were given to them by the Septuagint translators to indicate their contents: Genesis (Origin, Generation); Exodus (Departure); Leviticus (pertaining to the tribe of Levi); Numbers (translation of Greek Arithmoi, Latin Numeri, so called from the two census-records in this book); Deuteronomy (Second Law, because the Deuteronomic code is a repetition and expansion of the earlier ‘Book of the Covenant’, Exod. 20-23). In the Hebrew Bible, however, these books are named by the first words of first significant words that they contain: Genesis is

     2. Nĕbhī’ īm (Prophets):

     (a) Nĕbhī’ īm Rīshōnīm (Former Prophets): Joshua, judges, 1 and 2 Samuel, 1 and 2 Kings.

     (b) Nĕbhī’ īm ᾿Acharōnīm (Latter Prophets): Isaiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, and the Book of the Twelve Prophets.

     [In the Hebrew Bible the Twelve (or Minor) Prophets are reckoned as constituting one book. The common epithet ‘Minor’ applied to them concerns their length, not their importance.]

     3. Kĕthūbhīm (Writings): Psalms, Proverbs, Job; Song of Songs, Ruth, Lamentations, [In the Hebrew Bible Lamentations is denoted by the first word of the book, the sorrowful interjection ᾿Ekhāh (translated ‘How!’ in the English bible).] Ecclesiastes, Esther; [The five books, Song of Songs, Ruth, Lementations, Ecclesiastes, and Esther form a smaller group within the ‘Writings’; they are known as the five Μĕgillōth (Rolls.] Daniel, Ezra-Nehemiah, [Ezra and Nehemiah are reckoned as one book in the enumeration of the books of the Hebrew bible.] 1 and 2 Chronicles.

     [The arrangement of the books varied somewhat within the three main groupings; the above is the arrangement found in all printed copies of the Hebrew Bible.]

     The most noteworthy feature of the arrangement of the books in the Hebrew Bible is that several of the books which we regard as historical are there placed among the Prophets―Joshua, Judges, and the books of Samuel and Kings. The reason for this has been suggested already, these books are not simply concerned with recording events, but with using events to illustrate the great principles on which the prophets insisted. They teach prophetic lessons and are therefore listed among the prophetic books, along with those books which we recognize in a more literal sense as the books of the prophets.

     We might, of course, have expected a priori that if God wished to communicate the knowledge of His nature and will to mankind He might have done so in a series of propositions, after the manner of theological summaries, bodies of divinity and confessions of faith which are drawn up article by article in logical sequence. Doubtless God might have done so, but doubtless He never did. These doctrinal statements may be firmly based upon the Bible, and if so they have their place in religious life and teaching, but the Bible itself does not take this form. What we have just said with regard to the form of the Old Testament suggests that God chose to reveal Himself as the God of living action, revealing Himself in mighty acts of mercy and judgment and interpreting His ways to men through His spokesmen the prophets. He is no impassive Deity, detached from the world and wrapped up in His self existent Being. The very form of the Old Testament reveals the God He is, and prepares us for His incarnation in One who should both accomplish the greatest of all God’s mighty self-revealing acts and speak as His supreme Spokesman. And so we turn expectantly to the form assumed by the literature of the New Covenant.

(II) The New Testament

     The New Testament falls into three easily-distinguished sections: (a) narrative books; (b) epistles, and (c) the single book of Revelation, which belongs to the literary type which we describe by the epithet ‘apocalyptic’.

     (a) The first section, comprising five narrative books, is further divided between the four Gospels and the book of Acts. The four Gospels―or rather the four records of the one and only Gospel, which is the good news of God’s salvation brought near in Jesus Christ―are not, as is sometimes imagined, biographies of Christ, not in the proper sense of the word at any rate.     They are rather the written deposit of the early apostolic preaching and teaching, the burden of which was the works and words of Christ. The first three Gospels are commonly called the ‘Synoptic’ Gospels, because the amount of material common to all three or to two of them makes it convenient to view them synoptically, for example in three parallel columns where their common and special material may be taken in at a glance. Not that this is the only way to study these Gospels; some students have got so used to the synoptic approach that they have almost forgotten that each Gospel is a work by itself with a unity and emphasis of its own. The fourth Gospel was probably written after the first three, and presupposes them as being already in circulation in the Church. The evidence of this Gospel itself implies that it was written by John the Apostle, and this finds corroboration in our earliest external evidence bearing on the subject, according to which it was written at the dictation of John, the last survivor of the Apostles, shortly before his death at the end of the first century A.D.     Each of the four Gospels, with its distinctive picture of Christ, seems to have circulated at first in the churches of a particular area, but shortly after the appearance of the fourth the four appear to have been bound up together and acknowledged by the churches at large as the authoritative fourfold Gospel of Christ.

     The book of the Acts of the Apostles was the second part of a history of Christian origins written by Luke the physician of Antioch, the friend and travel-companion of Paul.     It takes up the story at the point where Part I of Luke’s history (the third Gospel) ends, the ascension of Christ, and tells how the Gospel spread along the road from Jerusalem to Rome in the first thirty years after the death and resurrection of Christ. When the Gospel of Luke was bound up with the other three Gospels, its sequel, the book of Acts, was left by itself; it was as a matter of convenience very frequently thereafter bound up with the General or Catholic Epistles.

     (b) The second section of the New Testament comprises twenty-one letters or epistles. Thirteen of these bear the name of Paul, two bear the name of Peter, one of James and one of Jude. Then there are three which do not bear the writer’s name, but their close affinity with the fourth Gospel bears out the tradition which ascribes them to the same author and so entitles them the ‘Epistles of John’. (In two of them the writer introduces himself as ‘The Elder’―a title by which he appears to have been familiarly known because of his great age and his being the sole survivor of the original disciples of Jesus.) There is one other anonymous epistle―The Epistle to the Hebrews―to which it is, perhaps, wiser not to try to assign any known personage as author. Seventeen hundred years ago the learned Church Father, Origen of Alexandria, had to confess: ‘Who really wrote it, God only knows’―and that is the position still.

     The Pauline Epistles fall into two groups―those written before the end of Paul’s two years’ imprisonment in Rome recorded in Acts 28. 30, and the Pastoral Epistles (those to Timothy and Titus) which were written later. The earlier group, dating between A.D. 48 and 61, forms our earliest extant Christian literature (with the possible exception of the Epistle of James), for our Gospels did not begin to circulate in writing until about the end of this period.

     (c) The book of Revelation, though not the last book of the New Testament to be written, is fittingly placed at the end of the Bible, because in the pictorial and symbolical language of the apocalyptic literature to which it belongs it gathers up all the threads of previous revelation and―against the background of a day of fierce persecution―portrays the triumph of Christ and His people and the advent of the day when ‘the kingdom of the world is become the kingdom of our Lord, and of His Christ: and He shall reign for ever and ever’ (Rev. 11. 15).

Chapter 8―The Canon of Scripture

     Our English word ‘canon’ goes back through Latin to the Greek kanōn, which in its turn was borrowed from a Semitic word which in Hebrew takes the form qāneh. The root meaning of the word is ‘reed’ (it is also the word from which our ‘cane’ is .derived). It then acquires a number of derivative senses; since a reed might be used as a measuring rod kanōn is found with this meaning, and also with the meaning of a rule or standard in a metaphorical sense. It is in this last sense that a Greek Father like Origen used the word kanōn to denote what we call the ‘rule of faith’, the standard by which we are to measure and evaluate every thing that may be offered to us as an article of belief. In this sense the word is closely linked with the authority of Scripture, because Scripture is the rule both of faith and of practice; it was given to teach us (in the words of the Westminster Shorter Catechism) ‘what man is to believe concerning God and what duty God requires of man’. Then there is a further use of kanōn in the sense of a list or index (this sense is probably derived from the series of marks on a measuring rod). This is the sense which lies behind the expression ‘the canon of Scripture’; the canon of Scripture is the list of books which are reckoned as Holy Scripture. But since the books which are reckoned as Holy Scripture are those which are reckoned as supremely authoritative for belief and conduct, the sense of ‘rule’ or ‘standard’ is never far away when we speak of the canon of Scripture.

     [Origen (184-254) uses the word kanōn in the sense of the ‘rule of faith’ but not in the sense of the ‘canon of Scripture’. It appears that this later sense, ‘the list of writings acknowledged by the Church as documents of the divine revelation,’ is not earlier than Athanasius (296-373). (See Journal of Theological Studies, 49 [1948], pp. 17-27.)]

     There is a distinction between the canonicity of a book of the Bible and its authority. Its canonicity is dependent upon its authority. For when we ascribe canonicity to a book we simply mean that it belongs to the canon or list. But why does it so belong? Because it was recognized as possessing special authority. People frequently speak and write as if the authority with which the books of the Bible are invested in the minds of Christians is the result of their having been included in the sacred list.     But the historical fact is the other way about; they were and are included in the list because they were acknowledged as authoritative.

     For example, when Moses came down from Mount Sinai and told the people all the words that he had received from God, reading them from the ‘book of the covenant’ in which he had written them, the people answered: ‘All that the Lord hath spoken will we do’ (Exod. 24. 7). That is to say, they acknowledged that the words they heard from Moses’ lips were the words of God, and therefore absolutely authoritative and binding. But we can hardly say that they recognized these words as canonical, for the idea of a list or collection of such writings lay still in the future. Or when, in New Testament times, Paul writes to the Christians in Corinth, ‘If any man thinketh himself to be a prophet, or spiritual, let him take knowledge of the things which I write unto you, that they are the commandment of the Lord’ (1 Cor. 14. 37), no doubt these members of the Church whose spiritual sense was alert acknowledged the written words of Paul as the commandments of Christ Himself. But the idea of a New Testament canon was still to take shape. Both logically and historically, authority precedes canonicity.

     In this chapter, then, we are not dealing so much with the recognition of the Biblical oracles as authoritative as with the formation of a canon of those writings which had already the stamp of authority upon them.     And in making our investigation, we must take the two Testaments separately.

(I) The Old Testament

     When our Lord Jesus appeared to His disciples in the upper room in Jerusalem on the evening of His resurrection, He impressed on them the fact that all that had happened to Him was in exact accord with what had been prophesied in Old Testament Scripture. He reminded them how, even before His crucifixion, He had told them ‘that all things must needs be fulfilled, which are written in the law of Moses, and the prophets, and the psalms, concerning Me’ (Luke 24. 44). In these words He indicated the three sections into which the Hebrew Bible was divided―the Law, the Prophets, and the ‘Writings’ (here probably called ‘the Psalms’ because the Book of Psalms is the first and longest book in this third section). We have already discussed the contents of these three sections in Chapter VII. Here what we must notice particularly is that our Lord refers to the threefold body of Old Testament writings not only as divinely authoritative but also as canonical, for the authoritative writings had been gathered together into one collection, and the distinctive feature of this collection was that all the writings within it were Holy Scripture, and all the writings outside it were not.

     It can be taken for granted that by this time the first two sections―the Law and the Prophets―contained all the books which they contain in the Hebrew Bible we know. But did the third section―the ‘Writings’ (or the Psalms, as our Lord said)―contain all the books which it now contains? Probably it did. It is almost certain that the Bible with which He was familiar ended with the books of Chronicles, which come right at the end of the ‘Writings’ in the Hebrew Bible. The evidence for this is that when He wished to sum up all the martyrs whose blood had been shed in Old Testament times He used the expression: ‘from the blood of Abel unto the blood of Zachariah, who perished between the altar and the sanctuary’ (Luke 11. 51; cf. Matt. 23. 35). Now Abel is obviously the first martyr of the Bible, but why should Zachariah come last? Because in the order of books in the Hebrew Bible he is the last martyr to be named; in 2 Chron. 24. 21 we read how he was stoned while he prophesied to the people ‘in the court of the house of the Lord’.

     The chief reason for asking if the ‘Writings’ section was complete in our Lord’s time is that we have records of discussions that went on among the Rabbis after the Fall of Jerusalem in A.D.

70 about some of the books in this section. When the destruction of the city and temple was imminent, a great Rabbi belonging to the school of Hillel in the Pharisaic parry―Yochanan ben Zakkai by name―obtained permission from the Romans to reconstitute the Sanhedrin on a purely spiritual basis at Jabneh or Jamnia, between Joppa and Azotus (Ashdod). Some of the discussions which went on at Jamnia were handed down by oral transmission and ultimately recorded in the Rabbinical writings. Among their debates they considered whether canonical recognition should be accorded to the books of Proverbs, Ecclesiastes, the Song of Songs and Esther. Objections had been raised against these books on various grounds; Esther, for example, did not contain the name of God, and Ecclesiastes was none too easy to square with contemporary orthodoxy. But the upshot of the Jamnia debates was the firm acknowledgment of all these books as Holy Scripture. Some disputants also asked whether the Wisdom of Jesus the son of Sira (Ecclesiasticus), and the gilyonim (Aramaic Gospel-writings) and other books of the minim (heretics―probably Jewish Christians), should be admitted, but here the answer was uncompromisingly negative.

     We should not exaggerate the importance of the Jamnia debates for the history of the canon. The books which they decided to acknowledge as canonical were already generally accepted, although questions had been raised about them. Those which they refused to admit had never been included. They did not expel from the canon any book which had previously been admitted. ‘The Council of Jamnia’, as J. S. Wright puts it, ‘was the confirming of public opinion, not the forming of it’.

     [The Evangelical Quarterly, April, 1947, p. 97. So also A. Bentzen, Introduction to the Old Testament, i (1948), p. 31, insists that the Jamnia ‘discussions have not so much dealt with acceptance of certain writings into the Canon, but rather with their right to remain there’.]

     In fact, one of the books which was debated most keenly in the first century A.D. was one whose presence in the second section of the Hebrew canon must have been settled long before the

book of Ezekiel. The chariot-vision of Ezekiel gave rise to a great deal of mystic speculation (some of it very unprofitable), and then there was a difficulty in reconciling the prescriptions for worship

in Ezek. 40-48 with those in the Pentateuch. ‘When Elijah comes,’ one said, ‘he will explain the difficulty’. But fortunately it was not necessary to wait so long. ‘Blessed be the memory of Hananiah, son of Hezekiah: if it had not been for him, the Book of Ezekiel would have been “hidden” (i.e., withdrawn from public reading), because its words contradict the words of the Law. What did he do? They brought him 300 measures of oil, and he sat down and explained it’.     The spectacle of Hananiah burning the midnight oil to the tune of 300 measures until he reconciled Ezekiel and Moses is an affecting one; but there is little likelihood that the expulsion of Ezekiel from the canon, or even its withdrawal from the lectionary, was a practical possibility at that late date. The Rabbis of the early centuries A.D., like disputants of all centuries, enjoyed a really tough subject for debate.

     [This fascinating question of the early rabbinical debates on canonicity is treated very perfunctorily above. For a fuller and authoritative treatment see G. F. Moore, Judaism, Vol. I (1927), pp. 238 ff.]

     Philo, the learned Jew of Alexandria, whose life overlapped the life of Christ by about twenty years at either end, seems to have known and accepted the Hebrew canon. The Law to him is preeminently inspired, but he also acknowledges the authority of the other books of the Hebrew canon (although, as an Alexandrian, he used only the Septuagint version). He does not regard the apocryphal books as authoritative, and this suggests that, although these books were included in the Septuagint, they were not really accorded canonical status by the Alexandrian Jews. [See p. 157.] We cannot however, be sure about Philo’s attitude to some of the Old Testament books, especially a few in the ‘Writings’, because he does not refer to them. We cannot say dogmatically that he accepted all the books of the Hebrew canon, though he may very well have done so.

     We are on firmer ground when we come to Josephus, another eminent Jew who wrote in Greek. For he tells us much more precisely what books were accounted specially authoritative by his

nation. ‘We have not 10,000 books among us’, he says, ‘disagreeing with and contradicting one another, but only twenty-two books, which contain the records of all time, and are justly believed to be divine. Five of these are by Moses, and contain his laws and traditions of the origin of mankind until his death.... From the death of Moses till the reign of Artaxerxes, king of Persia, who reigned after Xerxes, the prophets who succeeded Moses wrote down what happened in their times in thirteen books; and the remaining four books contain hymns to God and precepts for the conduct of human life’. [Josephus, Against Apion, i. 8.] Josephus, of course, knew and used other Jewish writings, such as 1 Maccabees, but of these later writings he says: ‘Our history has also been written in detail from Artaxerxes to our own times, but is not esteemed equally authoritative as the books already mentioned, because there was not then an exact succession of prophets’. His explanation of the exclusion of these latter books from the canon is in line with the rabbinic belief that scriptural inspiration ceased along with the gift of prophecy soon after the return from the Babylonian exile. In any case, Josephus echoes the prevailing opinion about what books were canonical and what were not. And though he uses the Septuagint freely, he does not regard the Apocrypha as canonical.

     But what are the twenty-two books to which he accords canonicity? The number of the books is probably arranged to agree with the number of letters in the Hebrew alphabet. The Pentateuch, of course, occupies a place by itself. As for the thirteen books written by the prophets, these will include the eight books in the ‘Prophets’ section of the Hebrew Bible, and also probably Daniel, Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah, Esther. If Ezra and Nehemiah were reckoned as one book, as in the Hebrew Bible, then Job might be included here as well. It has at least as much claim to be regarded as a ‘prophetic’ writing as Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah and Esther. Why Josephus should have included these among the books written by the prophets is not easy to understand. Possibly he felt he had to accommodate his theory that all the canonical books belonged to the prophetic era to the fact that these books were accepted in his time as canonical. The arrangement of the twenty-two books, 5 +13 + 4, may be his own idea. The four books of hymns and practical precepts may have been Psalms, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes and the Song of Songs (though it is just possible that he omitted the Song of Songs, in which case Job will have been one of these four, and Ezra and Nehemiah in the middle section will have been separated). Probably, too, he reckoned Ruth as an appendix to judges, and Lamentations to Jeremiah. The treatise Against Apion, in which this passage about the canon occurs, was written by Josephus towards the end of the first century A.D.

     The earliest extant Christian list of Old Testament books was drawn up by Melito, bishop of Sardis, about A.D. 170; he said he had obtained it by accurate enquiry while travelling in Syria. It has been preserved by Eusebius in the fourth book of his Ecclesiastical History. [Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. IV. 26.] ‘Their names are these’, writes Melito in a letter to his friend, Onesimus: ‘five books of Moses: Genesis, Exodus, Numbers, Leviticus, Deuteronomy. Jesus Naue, [Nauē is an early corruption of Naun (Gk. NAYN misread as NAYH) and appears generally in the Septuagint as the form for Nun, Joshua’s father.] Judges, Ruth. Four books of Kingdoms, two of Chronicles. The Psalms of David, Solomon’s Proverbs (also called Wisdom), Ecclesiastes, Song of Songs, Job. Of the Prophets: Isaiah, Jeremiah, the Twelve in a single book, Daniel, Ezekiel, Ezra.’ It is likely that Melito included Lamentations with Jeremiah, and Nehemiah with Ezra (though it is curious to find Ezra counted among the prophets). In that case, his list contains all the books of the Hebrew canon (arranged according to the Septuagint order), with the exception of Esther. Esther may have dropped out by accident, or may not have been included in the list he received from his informants in Syria. [See G. F. Moore, Judaism, Vol. I, pp. 238, 244 f.]

     Origen, the greatest Biblical scholar among the Greek Fathers (A.D. 185-254), gives a list of canonical Old Testament books, which he enumerates as twenty-two, and names in their Hebrew as well as their Greek titles. [Quoted by Eusebius, Hist. Eccl., VI. 25.] According to his reckoning the five books of Moses are followed by (6) Joshua, then (7) Judges and Ruth (which are reckoned as one among the Hebrews, he says), (8 and 9) the four books of Kingdoms (which among them count as one book of Samuel and one―our 1 and 2 Kings―which they call after its opening words, ‘And King David’). Then (10) Chronicles, reckoned as one, (11) Ezra and Nehemiah as one; (12) Psalms, (13) Proverbs, (14) Ecclesiastes, (15) Song of Songs; (16) Isaiah; (17) Jeremiah with Lamentations and the ‘Epistle of Jeremiah’, [See p. 162.] reckoned as one; (18) Daniel, (19) Ezekiel, (20) Job, (21) Esther. The book of the Twelve Prophets has been omitted from his list―accidentally, of course, because it is required to make up the twenty-two. ‘Outside these’, he adds, ‘are the books of Maccabees’.

     Jerome, the greatest Biblical scholar among the Latin Fathers (A.D. 347-420), says in the Preface to his commentary on Daniel: ‘I point out that Daniel is not reckoned among the prophets by the Hebrews, but among those who wrote the Hagiographa [the sacred Writings]. As a matter of fact they divide all Scripture into three parts―the Law, the Prophets, and the Hagiographa, consisting of five, eight and eleven books respectively’. But in his Prologue to the Books of Samuel and Kings, Jerome remarks that in some Jewish circles the number of books was reduced to twenty-two to correspond with the number of letters in the Hebrew alphabet, by counting Ruth along with judges and Lamentations along with Jeremiah; while in others the number was raised to twenty-seven (to allow for those letters of the alphabet, five in number, which have two forms each), [See p. 39.] by dividing Samuel, Kings, Chronicles, Ezra-Nehemiah and Jeremiah-Lamentations into two books each.

     It is frequently said that among the Jews before A.D. 70 the Alexandrian Canon (represented by the Septuagint) was larger than the Palestinian. But it is not at all certain that we ought to think of an Alexandrian Canon at all, [Unless we think of the authorized Greek version of the Pentateuch as an Alexandrian Canon (see p. 144).] as distinct from that accepted in Palestine. People who talk about a larger Alexandrian Canon are thinking of the inclusion of apocryphal books in the Septuagint translation. But it is remarkable that even Jewish writers who used the Septuagint, like Josephus and (what is more to the point) the Alexandrian Philo, do not attach divine authority to the Apocrypha. The question of the Apocryphal books is, of course, very relevant to this whole subject of the canon of Scripture, but we have dealt with it in a separate chapter (Chapter XIII).

     In the prologue which the Greek translator of Ecclesiasticus (the grandson of the Hebrew author) prefaced to the book about 132 B.C., he, refers more than once to the threefold division of the Jewish sacred books. He calls them variously ‘the law and the prophets and the others that have followed in their steps’, ‘the law and the prophets and the other books of our fathers’, and ‘the law itself and the prophecies and the rest of the books’. It is sometimes thought that the rather indefinite way in which he seems to refer to the third section of the Hebrew canon, the ‘Writings’, implies that this section was not yet closed. This, however, is not a certain inference; it is equally permissible to deduce from the words used that the Hebrew canon was already complete in its present form, and indeed we might deduce from the context in which these words are used that all these books had been translated into Greek by 132 B.C. However this may be, the language used by the translator of Ecclesiasticus does show that the threefold division of the Hebrew canon was known in his day.

     Does this threefold division throw any further light on the history of the Hebrew canon? It is commonly said to reveal the three stages by which the Old Testament books achieved canonical recognition. All scholars are not agreed on this point, however; it is denied, for example, by Professor E. J. Young, who says that ‘there certainly is no evidence to support the view that there were three canons, that the Pentateuch was first accepted as canonical, then, at a later time, the Prophets and, finally, the Writings’.

     [In an essay on ‘The Authority of the Old Testament’, in the symposium The Infallible Word (ed. N. B. Stonehouse and P. Woolley, 1947), p. 85,

     But while there is no direct evidence, it is a very reasonable view. We should not speak of three canons, but that the Pentateuch was first accepted as canonical is a proposition which should commend itself even more to those who believe that the complete Pentateuch antedated the prophetical writings than to those who accept more or less the conclusions of the Wellhausen school, [A school which holds that the Pentateuch did not reach its final form and arrangement until after the Babylonian exile.] which Professor Young is more particularly concerned to refute in the article to which we refer. The book of the Law was acknowledged as the very word of God from its earliest existence.

     As for the second division, the ‘Prophets’, both its subdivisions as such (the Former and the Latter Prophets), while they contain much pre-exilic matter, must date after the fall of the southern kingdom. The last event in the Former Prophets is dated in 562 B. C. (the first year of Evil-merodach’s reign over Babylon), and the Latter Prophets cannot have been complete much, if at all, before 400 B.C.

     [The commentary on Habakkuk found at Ain Feshkha (see p. 113 n.) is evidence that Habakkuk was regarded as Holy Scripture by the first century B.C.]

     But this is not to deny that the words of the prophets were divinely authoritative from the moment of utterance, and that the documents in which they were recorded were canonical in principle, if not in a technical sense, from the first.

     The third division, the ‘Writings’, belongs as a completed corpus to a date somewhat later in the post-exilic age than the ‘Prophets’. But this does not necessarily mean that the individual books in the ‘Writings’ are all later in date or lower in authority than the component parts of the ‘Prophets’. Many of the Psalms and Proverbs, for example, are no doubt earlier than anything in the ‘Latter Prophets’. It has been suggested in the previous chapter that the Septuagint preserves an order of the Old Testament books which may antedate the canonical order of the Hebrew Bible, as in some respects it keeps books in their original relationship, which has been dislocated in the Hebrew Bible. Thus in the Septuagint Chronicles precedes Ezra and Nehemiah, whereas it follows them in the Hebrew Bible. Some have inferred from this fact that Ezra and Nehemiah were accepted as canonical before Chronicles.

     For Christians, however, it suffices that the Hebrew canon of the Old Testament was accepted as divinely authoritative by our Lord and His apostles. The apostles, no doubt, found in their Master’s attitude to these writings sufficient warrant for theirs, and He accepted them, not because their canonicity had been handed down by tradition, but because He recognized their divine quality. In many points He condemned the Jewish tradition, but not with respect to the canonicity of Scripture. His complaint, indeed, was that by other traditions they had invalidated in practice the Word of God recorded in canonical Scripture. But in point of the canonicity of Scripture He confirmed their tradition, not because it was tradition, but because He knew on independent grounds that it was right. And in this as in all else we are safe when we follow Him. ‘What was indispensable to the Redeemer’, it has been well said, ‘must always be indispensable to the redeemed’.

     [Sir G. A. Smith, Modern Criticism and the Preaching of the Old Testament (1901), p. 11.]

(II) The New Testament

     A famous series of lectures delivered before Yale University in 1899 began with the startling words: ‘Few realize that the Church of Christ possesses a higher warrant for her Canon of the Old Testament than she does for her Canon of the New’. [G. A. Smith, op. cit., p.5.] For, as the lecturer went on to point out, the Old Testament is accredited by the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ in a way which, in the very nature of the case, does not apply to the New. For it was the Old Testament Scriptures that constituted Christ’s Bible. ‘He accepted its history as the preparation for Himself, and taught His disciples to find Him in it.     He used it to justify His mission and to illuminate the mystery of His Cross. He drew from it many of the examples and most of the categories of His gospel. He re-enforced the essence of its law and restored many of its ideals. But, above all, He fed His own soul with its contents, and in the great crises of His life sustained Himself upon it as upon the living and sovereign Word of God’. [Op. cit., p. 11.] Obviously (as it must appear to every Christian) no body of literature ever had its credentials confirmed by a higher authority.

     Does this mean that we receive the New Testament on lower authority than the Old? Not really; it only means that the impartation of Christ’s authority to the New is less immediately apparent. But when we look into the matter we find that He who accredited the Old Testament retrospectively accredited the New Testament prospectively. The fourth Evangelist relates how Jesus, on the eve of His crucifixion, promised His disciples to send them the Holy Spirit, His Other Self, of whom He said among other things: ‘He shall teach you all things, and bring to your remembrance all that I said unto you.... He shall guide you into all the truth ... and He shall declare unto you the things that are to come’ (John 14. 26; 16. 13). The New Testament, Christians believe, is the written deposit of the special fulfillment of these words of Christ in the life and witness of His apostles. But are Christians justified in believing this?

     The New Testament, as it lies before us now, consists of twenty-seven documents―five narrative records, twenty-one letters, and a book of visions.     It appears, from a consideration of internal and external evidence, that all (or nearly all) of these were in existence by A.D. 100. But how did they come to form part of one collection: Who made the collection, and why? And what was the nature of the authority by which they were accepted by Christians as the complement of the dominically-ratified Old Testament corpus, so that both together make up the Church’s rule of faith and life?

     [For a fuller answer to this question, see the excellent essay by Professor N. B. Stonehouse on ‘The Authority of the New Testament,’ in the symposium The Infallible Word (Tyndale Press, 1947).]

     It goes without saying that, to all who acknowledged our Lord as Messiah and Son of God, His utterances could be no less authoritative than those of the prophets through whom God had spoken in Old Testament times. ‘God, having of old time spoken unto the fathers in the prophets by divers portions and in divers manners, hath at the end of these days spoken unto us in His Son’ (Heb. 1. 1). The divine message through the prophets was partial and intermittent; it found fulfillment and finality in the revelation which came in Jesus Christ.

     The prophets were the vehicles of divine inspiration in varying degrees and from time to time; in Jesus the Holy Spirit dwelt in permanent fullness, and He Himself was the Word of God incarnate. The written record of His words must therefore inevitably receive a meed of veneration at least equal to that accorded to the Old Testament oracles.

     But just as in Old Testament times God revealed Himself by saving acts as well as in prophetic words, so the crowning revelation of God in Christ was conveyed not only through the words He said but also through the deeds He performed, and supremely in the great saving acts of His death and resurrection. The records of God’s preparatory saving acts in Old Testament times were reckoned as prophetic writings; how much more the record of His full salvation brought near to mankind in His Son? So the Gospels contain not only the teaching of Jesus, but the narrative of His mighty works, leading up to the mightiest of all. The twofold contents of the Gospels are the written deposit of the twofold witness of the apostles. The apostles were commissioned by Christ not only to make known throughout the nations the good news of the salvation which God had accomplished in Him, but also to make disciples of all the nations by teaching them all that He Himself had commanded. In discharge of this commission the apostles bore a twofold testimony―to ‘all that Jesus began to do and to teach’. The apostles proclaimed from place to place the good news of what Christ had done, and to those who believed the good news and became members of the new Christian communities which the apostles founded they communicated further the teaching of Christ―both by word of mouth and by letter. The earliest documents in the New Testament are letters written by apostles to their converts and other Christians imparting this teaching and applying it to the various situations that arose in the infant churches. As the apostles did this, we believe, they experienced the fulfillment of their Lord’s promise that His Spirit would lead them into all the truth. But it is a remarkable fact that there is no teaching in the New Testament which is not already present in principle in the teaching of Jesus Himself. The apostles did not add to His teaching; under the guidance of the promised Spirit they interpreted and applied it. And therefore their teaching, whether delivered orally or in writing, was intended to be received as the message of Christ Himself, just as the official communications made by an ambassador are intended to be received not as his personal observations but as the words of the sovereign whom he represents. Long before the apostolic letters were recognized as elements in a canonical collection, they were recognized as divinely authoritative by those for whom they were written; as we said before, authority is the necessary precedent of canonicity.

     Until about the sixties of the first century A.D. the need for written Gospels does not appear to have arisen. So long as the eyewitnesses of the great salvation-bringing events were alive to tell the tale, it was not so necessary to have a formal written record. But the apostles were not going to live on earth for ever, and it was obviously desirable that their message should be preserved after they had gone. So we find Mark, the companion and interpreter of Peter, committing to writing in Rome the Gospel as Peter habitually proclaimed it; shortly afterwards we have Matthew’s Gospel appearing in the East, based largely upon a collection of the sayings of Jesus probably written down first by Matthew himself; and Luke, the companion of Paul, writes in two books for Gentile readers a narrative of the beginnings of Christianity from the birth of John the Baptist up to Paul’s two years’ residence in Rome (A.D. 61-62). Towards the end of the century, John, perhaps the last surviving companion of Jesus in the days of His flesh, writes his reminiscences of his Master’s life and teaching, together with his meditations on them, in such a way as to supplement the earlier Gospels. The Gospels are not simple biographies―they are rather written transcripts of the Gospel preached by the apostles.

     But we have not yet a canon in the sense of a collection of these writings. Towards the end of the first century, however, we find the beginnings of a movement in this direction. Not long after the writing of the fourth Gospel, the four Gospels appear to have been brought together in one collection. Thus, whereas previously Rome had Mark’s Gospel, and Syria had Matthew’s, and the Greek Christians Luke’s, and Ephesus John’s, now each church had all four in a corpus which was called The Gospel (each of the components being distinguished by the additional words According to Matthew, According to Mark, and so on). About the same time, or possibly a few years earlier, came to gather together the letters which Paul had written to various churches and individuals, and thus a further collection began to circulate among the churches, bearing the title The Apostle (the various components being distinguished by the sub-headings To the Romans, First to the Corinthians, and so on).

     When the four Gospels were gathered together in one collection this meant that the two parts of Luke’s history of Christian beginnings must be separated from each other. Part I, which carried the story on to the appearances of the risen Christ to His disciples, was included in the fourfold Gospel with the caption According to Luke; Part II, which carried the record on from that point for a further thirty years or so, was left by itself, and in course of time received the title Acts of Apostles. But Acts naturally shared the authority and prestige of the third Gospel, being the work of the same author; and besides, it was a very important book. Not only did it provide the sequel to the Gospel story, but it was an indispensable companion to the Pauline collection. Who was this Paul? What were the grounds for the apostolic authority which he claimed for himself (as he was manifestly not one of the Twelve whom Jesus had appointed to be with Him)? Such questions as these must have occurred to readers of the group of letters entitled The Apostle. But Acts made the source and quality of Paul’s apostolic commission and service very plain. It therefore served as a link between the fourfold Gospel and the Pauline corpus, and thus well merits Harnack’s description of it as the ‘pivotal’ book of the New Testament. [A. Harnack, The Origin of the New Testament (1925), pp. 64 f.]

     The letters of other apostles and ‘apostolic men’, and the Apocalypse of the prophet, John, which he had received from Christ to communicate to the churches, were for similar reasons recognized to bear divine authority.

     Now, about A.D. 140, a teacher from Asia Minor came to Rome and introduced a novel form of teaching. This was the heretic, Marcion, [See p.78.] and he soon had a following large enough to cause the ecclesiastical leaders in Rome and elsewhere considerable concern. In accordance with his views about the supersession of the Old Testament, he rejected the Bible of our Lord and the Apostles and drew up a canon to take its place. This canon consisted of two sections―The Gospel and The Apostle. Marcion’s Gospel consisted of an expurgated edition of the Gospel of Luke, which he probably regarded as the least Jewish of the Gospels, as its author was a Gentile; his Apostle consisted of the Pauline letters (excluding those to Timothy and Titus). Even the books which he did accept as canonical Scripture were edited in accordance with what he believed to be pure Christian doctrine. No doubt he believed that by this process of editing he was removing interpolations introduced by those who followed the teaching of the Twelve, as distinct from Paul, who in Marcion’s eyes was the only faithful apostle. Thus anything even in Paul’s epistles which seemed to recognize the authority of the God of Israel or to identify Him with the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ was cut out; it could not, on Marcion’s premises, be genuine. All Old Testament references were likewise excised. And in accordance with his belief that Jesus was a supernatural being who appeared suddenly among men in the mere semblance of humanity, his Gospel began with the words: ‘In the fifteenth year of Tiberius Caesar, in the times of Pontius Pilate, Jesus came down to Capernaum, a city of Galilee, and taught in the synagogue’. This statement is based on Luke 3. 1; 4. 3 1, but it deliberately omits Luke’s birth-narratives, the ministry of John the Baptist, the baptism of Jesus, His genealogy (according to Marcion, He had no human descent), and His temptation.

     Marcion’s followers formed quite an influential group for a considerable time, and looked like atracting many others from the orthodox churches. The church leaders saw the necessity of defining

the canon of New Testament Scripture more explicitly by way of countering Marcion’s canon. It is not correct to say, as is sometimes said, that Marcion was the first to draw up a New Testament canon, and that the orthodox party thereupon drew up theirs as a reply to his. The canon was well on its way to taking clear shape before Marcion’s activity began. But his activity certainly provided the church leaders, especially in Rome, where he chiefly propagated his views, with an incentive to state the orthodox position regarding the canon more clearly. The main points of this position were that the canon contained four Gospels, not one; thirteen Pauline epistles, not only ten; the book of Acts, which vindicated the apostolic commission of Paul, but also related something of the doings of other apostles, and thus refuted Marcion’s depreciation of those; and (in addition to the writings of Paul) writings of some other apostles and ‘apostolic men’.

     [The evidence of the writings of Irenus is important in this connection, because of his ecumenical interests: brought up in Asia Minor at the feet of Polycarp, the disciple of John, he became bishop of Lyons in Gaul, about A.D. 180. His writings attest the canonical recognition of the fourfold Gospel and Acts, of Rom., 1 and 2 Cor., Gal., Eph., Phil., Col., 1 and 2 Thess., 1 and 2 Tim., and Titus, of 1 Peter and 1 John, and of the Revelation. In his treatise, Against Heresies, III, II, 8, it is evident that by A.D. 180 the idea of the fourfold Gospel had become so axiomatic throughout Christendom that it could be referred to as an established fact as obvious and inevitable and natural as the four cardinal points of the compass or the four winds.]eresies, III, 11, 8, it is evident that by A.D. 180 the idea of the fourfold Gospel had become so axiomatic throughout Chrfistendom that it could be referred to as an established fact as obvious and inevitable and natural as the four cardinal points of the compass or the four winds.]

     An early list of New Testament books, drawn up in the church at Rome later in the second century, is called the Muratorian fragment, after the antiquarian, L. A. Muratori, who discovered it in manuscript and published it in 1740.     It is pretty obviously an orthodox counterblast to Marcion. The fragment is mutilated at the beginning, but seems to have mentioned Matthew and Mark, because it goes on to mention Luke as the ‘third’ Gospel; then it mentions John, and gives a curious account of the circumstances under which his Gospel was composed. Acts is next named, and called the ‘Acts of all the apostles’―an obvious misnomer, but equally obviously a reminder that all the apostles were to be recognized, and not Paul only. Then it enumerates Paul’s nine letters to churches and four to individuals, Jude’s epistle, two epistles of John, and the Apocalypse of John and that of Peter. [See p. 235. It also adds the Wisdom of Solomon (see p. 162).] The Shepherd of Hermas (an allegory written by a member of the Roman church early in the second century is then said to be worthy to be read in church but not to be included among the prophetic or apostolic writings.

     Two practical questions may be noticed here; some direction had to be given about the public reading of books in church, and the relation between canonicity and apostolic authorship was raised. On the first score, it is plain that the number of books that might be read in church was larger than the number of those which were to be accounted canonical. Just as the sixth Anglican Article of Religion permits the Old Testament Apocrypha to be read ‘for example of life and instruction of manners’ but not as part of the rule of faith, so in the Early Church several books were read for public edification which were never really regarded as divinely authoritative. In days when books were few and each copy had to be reproduced separately by hand, it was natural that some books would, for general convenience, be read at public gatherings of Christians which would nowadays be read at home. This may help to explain why early manuscript copies of the Scriptures have such books bound in with the canonical ones. Thus the Codex Sinaiticus included the Epistle of Barnabas and the Shepherd of Hermas; the Codex Alexandrinus had the letter which Clement wrote on behalf of the Roman church to the Corinthian church about A.D. 95, the ancient Christian homily conventionally called the Second Epistle of Clement, and the ‘Psalms of Solomon’, a collection of Jewish hymns of the first century B.C. A work called the ‘Gospel of Peter’ was read in a church near Antioch about A.D. 190 in all innocence until the bishop of Antioch discovered that it was an heretical document. Possibly the readers and hearers honestly imagined that it was really a narrative by the Apostle Peter himself.

     This brings us to the other point mentioned.     It is sometimes said that the criterion which the early Christians applied in deciding whether a book was to be regarded as canonical or not was that of apostolic authorship. Now, it is certain that apostolic authorship counted for very much. It was for this reason that such a flood of apocryphal literature appears in the second century bearing the names of various apostles―Gospels, Acts, Epistles, and Apocalypses. The intention certainly was to win respect for these books by putting them forth under such authoritative names. And there is no example of a certainly apostolic writing being refused canonical recognition, except among people like the Marcionites. But apostolic authorship, though an important factor, was not the only ground of canonicity.     It is probably a mistake to think that we owe the presence of the Epistle to the Hebrews in our Bibles entirely to the happy accident that it was popularly ascribed to Paul.     For, after all, two of the Gospels bear the names of men who were not apostles, and yet that did not stand in the way of accepting Mark and Luke as equally inspired with Matthew and John. True, Mark and Luke were ‘apostolic men’―close companions of the apostles―but their Gospels won such early and widespread acceptation just because they bore the convincing marks of real authority. When the Lord Jesus asked the Pharisees whether John’s baptism was carried out by divine or human authority and they professed themselves unable to answer, He would not tell them the source of His own authority. In other words, if they could not tell divine authority when they saw it, no argument or sign would convince them of it. The early Christians were not exceptionally intelligent people, but they did have the capacity to recognize divine authority when they saw it. And that they judged wisely in distinguishing the canonical writings from the uncanonical will be apparent to anyone who compares the New Testament with other early Christian literature.

     Another practical consideration grew out of the disputes with heretics. In these disputes what books could be appealed to as undoubtedly authoritative? And yet another arose when the last great persecution of Christians under the Roman Empire broke out in A.D. 303. In this persecution an attempt was made to destroy the Christian Scriptures, and church officials were visited by the imperial police and ordered to hand over their sacred books. To hand over copies of Holy Scripture for destruction was, in the Christians’ eyes, as bad as outright apostasy; but it was tempting to hand over other Christian books in the belief that the police would not know the difference. In this way a practical distinction might be made between books which must not be handed over on any account and books which perhaps might be handed over. But this had no practical importance for the fixing of the canon; by this time there was general agreement about the limits of the canon. It merely served to make those limits more widely known among the generality of Christians.

     It is evident that at an early time New Testament books were read in church meetings along with the books of the Old Testament. Justin Martyr, about the middle of the second century, says that the ‘memoirs of the apostles’ were read in Christian gatherings on Sundays along with the ‘writings of the prophets’. [First Apology, chap. 67.]

     Origen, [Quoted by Eusebius, Hist. Eccl. VI, 25.] about A.D. 230, enumerates in the list of New Testament books the four Gospels, Acts, Paul’s thirteen epistles, 1 Peter, 1 John and Revelation, as those which are acknowledged by all Christians; he adds that Hebrews, 2 Peter, 2 and 3 John, James and Jude, with the ‘Epistle of Barnabas’, the Shepherd of Hermas, the Didach, and the ‘Gospel according to the Hebrews’ were disputed by some. This means simply that all the churches by his time were in agreement about the canonical quality of most of the New Testament books, but that a few doubted some of the less well-known epistles, while others were inclined to include some books which did not secure a permanent place in the canon. Eusebius, [Hist. Eccl., III, 25.] early in the fourth century, mentions all the books of the New Testament as generally acknowledged except James, Jude, 2 Peter, 2 and 3 John. These, he says, were still disputed by some Christians, but recognized by the majority. The first known list of the twenty-seven books which we recognize appears in the Festal Letter written by Athanasius, bishop of Alexandria, to the churches when announcing the date of Easter in A.D. 367. Shortly afterwards we find Jerome and Augustine in the west defining the canon by listing these same twenty-seven books.

     What is particularly important to notice is that the New Testament canon was not demarcated by the arbitrary decree of any Church Council. When at last a Church Council―the Synod of Carthage in A.D. 397―listed the twenty-seven books of the New Testament, it did not confer upon them any authority which they did not already possess, but simply recorded their previously established canonicity. As Dr. Foakes Jackson puts it: ‘The Church assuredly did not make the New Testament; the two grew up together’. [A History of Church History (1939), p. 21.] We may well believe that those early Christians acted by a wisdom higher than their own in this matter, not only in what they accepted, but in what they rejected. Divine authority is by its very nature self-evidencing; and one of the profoundest doctrines recovered by the Reformers is the doctrine of the inward witness of the Holy Spirit, by which testimony is borne within the believer’s heart to the divine character of Holy Scripture. This witness is not confined to the individual believer, but is also accessible to the believing community; and there is no better example of its operation than in the recognition by the members of the Early Church of the books which were given by inspiration of God to stand alongside the books of the Old Covenant, the Bible of Christ and His . apostles, and with them to make up the written Word of God.

Chapter 9―The Text of the Old Testament

     Early in 1948 there was announced the discovery of several ancient manuscripts in Palestine, a discovery to which sober and distinguished scholars applied adjectives like ‘sensational’ and ‘phenomenal’―words not generally employed in the world of scholarship. Of these manuscripts the one which excited greatest interest was a complete parchment scroll of the book of Isaiah in Hebrew, the property of the Syrian Orthodox Monastery of St. Mark in Jerusalem. When this roll was examined by experts of the American Schools of Oriental Research, it was seen at once to be older by far than any roll of Hebrew scripture hitherto known. Professor Millar Burrows of Yale University assigned it to the first century B.C.; [As reported in The biblical Archologist, May, 1948, pp. 21 ff.] Professor W. F. Albright, of Johns Hopkins University, put it even earlier, ‘about the second century B.C.’

     [Professor Albright gives his account in the Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, April, 1948, pp. 2 f.]

     Professor Albright seems at first to have based his estimate on a comparison between the scripts of this newly discovered roll and of an early copy of the Ten Commandments in Hebrew, the Nash Papyrus, belonging to Cambridge University Library.

     [The Nash papyrus contains the Decalogue (Deut. 5. 6-21) and the Shema (‘Hear, O Israel,…’, Deut. 6. 4-5) in Hebrew, but in a form closer to the Septuagint than to the Masoretic text. It is more usually ascribed to the 2nd century A.D.]

     He holds that the Nash Papyrus is ‘late Maccabaean, from the first century B.C.’, and the script of the Isaiah roll is ‘materially older’ than that of the Nash Papyrus. But further evidence appears to confirm his dating of the Isaiah scroll.

     [See, for example, articles by J. C. Trever and S. A. Birnbaum, in the Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, for February, 1949. on the palography of the Isaiah scroll and its companions. When the cave where the discovery was made (at Ain Feshkha, near Jericho) was visited early in 1949, it was found that the jars in which the manuscripts had been preserved belonged to the pre-Roman period. A considerably later dating, however (c. A.D. 400), is suggested by G. R. Driver in The Times, of August 23, 1949; but even so this considerably antedates Hebrew manuscripts previously known.]

     Much work of the highest importance for Biblical studies remains to be done on this Isaiah manuscript and the others which were found with it.

     [Along with this Isaiah scroll the Syrian Monastery acquired possession of a commentary on Habakkuk, a manual of discipline of an old Jewish sect, a scroll of Enoch literature in Aramaic, and (later) a few fragments of two separate scrolls of the book of Daniel. The Hebrew University of Jerusalem acquired another copy of part of Isaiah (chaps. 48 to 60), a collection of hymns of praise, and a work which has been entitled ‘The War of the Children of Light against the Children of Darkness.’ The first account of these was given by Professor E. L. Sukenik, of the Hebrew University, in a volume entitled Megilloth Genuzoth (‘Hidden Scrolls’), published in Jerusalem in 1948. Among fragments more recently found in the cave are portions of Genesis, Leviticus, Deuteronomy, Judges, and the book of Jubilees; the Leviticus fragments exhibit a script even earlier than that of the others.

     Our business is to consider further why scholars were so excited at its discovery. Simply stated, the reason for their excitement is that ‘the script of this parchment’ (to quote Professor Albright), ‘is easily a thousand years older than that of the oldest Hebrew biblical roll hitherto known’.

     The New Testament, of course, was written when the Old Testament was already complete. But we have extant copies of the Greek New Testament far older than any extant copies of the

Hebrew Old Testament. We have copies of the Greek New Testament written in the fourth century A.D., very substantial fragments dating from the third century, and some pieces which have survived from the second century. But when we turn to our earliest copies of the Hebrew Bible, we find them separated by a much greater space of time from the autographs. The Revisers’ Preface to the Old Testament (1884) mentions in a footnote that ‘the earliest MS. of which the age is certainly known bears date A.D. 916.’ This is a codex of the Prophets at Leningrad. Another very early Hebrew MS at Leningrad (very early, that is to say, as Hebrew MSS. go) is a codex of the whole Old Testament belonging to the first decade of the eleventh century. Oxford possesses an almost complete codex of the Hebrew Old Testament nearly as old as this, and at Aleppo there is a codex a little older. Older still is a codex of the Hebrew Pentateuch in the British Museum, usually dated in the ninth century, and a Cairo codex of the Prophets, completed in A.D. 895.

     The reason for the relatively late date of our oldest existing Hebrew MSS is not far to seek. It is largely bound up with the almost superstitious veneration with which the Rabbis regarded the actual copies of Holy Scripture. When these were too old and worn to be of any further use for ordinary reading purposes, they were reverently interred. It was better, they thought, to give them honourable burial than to allow the risk that the name of God inscribed upon them might be profaned by the improper use of the material.     Before they were taken to consecrated ground for burial they were stored for a shorter or longer time in what is called a genizah―a room attached to the synagogue where documents no longer in use were stowed away or hidden (genizah literally means a ‘hiding place’).

     One such genizah, by some happy chance, continued to house its literary contents for hundreds of years, until they were discovered and made available to Hebrew scholars in the second half of last century. This was the genizah of a synagogue in Old Cairo, which has in recent years formed the subject of a fascinating book by Dr. Paul Kahle―The Cairo Geniza (the British Academy Schweich Lectures in Biblical Archology for 1941). Among the other treasures which this old storeroom contained were many portions of Hebrew Scripture belonging to a period older than those already mentioned. These and other documents found in the genizah have greatly added to our knowledge of the condition of the text of the Old Testament in the centuries before A.D. 900.

     It was not only wear and tear, however, that led to the removal of old copies of the Hebrew Bible. We know that in the centuries preceding A.D. 900 Jewish scholars were at work on the Hebrew Bible, doing their best to safeguard the purity of the text. They set themselves to consider variant readings found in the manuscripts at their disposal and to decide between them. About A.D. 100 they produced a standard edition of the consonantal text of the Old Testament. Then, in order to safeguard the proper understanding and interpretation of this text, succeeding generations of scholars affixed to it a large number of signs calculated to guide readers in the synagogues in the right enunciation of the sacred writings―punctuation marks as well as vowel points, since Hebrew was no longer a living vernacular. They further supplied a large body of notes on the text, the longer notes being placed at the beginning and end of the MSS., and the shorter notes written in the margins.

     These editors did not carry out their work according to the strict canons of what we nowadays call Textual Criticism. Their business rather was to study and edit the text of the Hebrew Bible found in the copies available to them in the light of the authoritative traditions which had been handed down to them through successive generations of teachers. It is from this concern with tradition that these editors received the name by which they are generally known―Masoretes. This name is derived from the Hebrew word māsōrāh, ‘tradition’; and the text which the Masoretes established on the basis of their studies is similarly known as the ‘Masoretec’ text.

     It must not be thought that in their devotion to traditional interpretation these Masoretes took liberties with the sacred text. On the contrary, they treated it with the greatest imaginable reverence, and devised a complicated system of safeguards against scribal slips. They counted, for example, the number of times each letter of the alphabet occurs in each book; they pointed out the middle letter of the Pentateuch and the middle letter of the whole Hebrew Bible, and made even more detailed calculations than these. ‘Everything countable seems to be counted’, says Dr. Wheeler Robinson; [Ancient and English Versions of the Bible (1940), p. 29.] and they made up mnemonics by which the various totals might be readily remembered.

     When the Masoretic text was finally established by these means, it appears that previous copies of the Scriptures were withdrawn from use and consigned to genizoth as a preliminary step to

interment. The final recension of the Masoretic text became the standard for all subsequent copies of the Hebrew Bible, whether in manuscript form or in printed editions. Of course, with the best care in the world a few variations have crept into the text in the course of its being copied and recopied by hand and at the press during the last thousand years.     Hitherto printed editions of the Hebrew Bible have followed the text of an edition printed in 1524-5 under the editorship of a Hebrew Christian called Jacob Ben Chayyim. But Dr. Kahle has pointed out that Ben Chayyim’s text depended on manuscripts not earlier than the fourteenth century. The latest standard edition of the Hebrew Bible―the third edition of R. Kittel’s Biblia Hebraica (published at Stuttgart in 1937)―shows a text prepared by Dr. Kahle on the basis of the Leningrad copy of the complete Old Testament dated 1008-9. This copy is closely related to the Aleppo copy already mentioned (which was not available to Dr. Kahle).     In addition to this Leningrad copy Dr. Kahle availed himself of photographs of the ancient codex of the Pentateuch in the British Museum and the Cairo codex of the Prophets, both of which date from the closing years of the ninth century. These copies, together with the Leningrad codex of the Prophets, represent the text established by members of a Masoretic family of Tiberias in Palestine―the Ben Asher family. On the basis of these early copies a more accurate edition of the Masoretic text has been produced than any previously printed.

     The treasures found in the Cairo genizah included portions of the Hebrew Bible antedating this final Masoretic recension, and these revealed something of the lengthy process of Masoretec work on the text of the Old Testament. There were Masoretes at work in Babylonia as well as at Tiberias in the centuries preceding A.D. 900, although the form which ultimately prevailed was the form established at Tiberias. There is reason to think that the Masoretes were stimulated in their activities in the eighth and ninth centuries by the example of Muslim scholars who had already done similar work for the text and pronunciation of the Koran.

     Of the signs or ‘points’ added by the Masoretes to the consonantal text of the Hebrew Scriptures, some denoted the vowel-sounds, since the Hebrew alphabet contained only consonants. Others indicated the punctuation, and others showed the reader when he had to pronounce something different from the text which lay before him. There are several places in the Old Testament where one word is written (kĕthībh, as it is called) and quite another word publicly read (qĕrē). For example, we are told in Judges 18. 30 that the priest who functioned at the sanctuary in Dan, where there was a graven image, was a grandson of Moses (see R.V.).

     But this was felt to be such a scandalous state of affairs that those who revered the name of Moses preferred not to draw public attention to it. The synagogue reader was therefore directed to say ‘Manasseh’ instead of ‘Moses’ when he came to this verse. And lest he should forget, the letter N was inserted between M and S―not actually on the line, but suspended.     We might represent the resulting appearance of the Hebrew consonantal text שה נ מ

by the English letters MNSH. The consonants of ‘Moses’ are משה MSH ; those of ‘Manasseh’ are s מנשה MNSH; and by inserting the suspended N into MSH these pious editors spared the embarrassment of readers and hearers. It was not that they wanted these people to think that the idolatrous priest in question was really the son of Manasseh and not of Moses; in that case they would have written the inserted N on the line instead of suspending it. But they did suggest that this priest’s behaviour made him a fitter associate of the wicked king Manasseh, or of the Manasseh who built the schismatic temple on Mount Gerizim, than of Moses, the man of God.

     One permanent differentiation of the kĕthībh (the written text) from the qĕrē (the word to be read) concerns the Divine Name which we know as Jehovah. In the consonantal text of the Hebrew Bible this word is written with four consonants יהוה which we may represent by YHWH. In the later centuries B.C. this name came to be regarded with such veneration that it ceased to be used. The third Commandment enjoins: ‘Thou shalt not take the nameof YGWH thy God in vain, for YHWH will not hold him guiltless that taketh His name in vain’. Primarily this may be a warning against perjury, though we need not limit its scope to perjury in the technical sense. The Westminster Shorter Catechism is no doubt right in affirming that this Commandment ‘requireth the holy and reverent use of God’s names, titles, attributes, ordinances, word, and works’ and ‘forbiddeth all profaning or abusing of any thing whereby God maketh himself known’. The ancient Jews felt something like this, and decided that the best way of avoiding the unworthy use of the Divine Name was not to use it at all. At first, probably, they gave up using it in ordinary conversation; then they even gave up using it when reading the Scriptures aloud, and substituted a term like ‘Lord’ or ‘God’ in its place. This was already the custom when the Hebrew Scriptures began to be translated into Greek in the third century B.C., for in that translation (the Septuagint) the name YHWH is not rendered as a proper name but represented by the Greek word for ‘Lord’ (kyrios) or ‘God’ (theos). It is said that the only occasion on which it was actually pronounced in those days was when the High Priest uttered it on his annual entry into the Holy of Holies in the Temple on the Great Day of Atonement; and that practice came to an end with the destruction of the Temple in A.D. 70. So the original pronunciation seems to have been forgotten among the Jews. At any rate, when the editors of whom we have been speaking affixed vowel signs to the Hebrew consonants for the guidance of readers, there would have been no point in any case in attaching the proper vowel signs to the consonants YHWH, as the word was not to be pronounced. What they did was to attach to the consonants YHWH the vowel signs of the word that was to be read in its place, whether of ᾿Adōnāy (‘Lord’) or of᾿Elōhīm (‘God’). When the knowledge of Hebrew was revived in Western Europe from the thirteenth century onwards, it was not realized at first that the consonants YHWH were accompanied by the vowels of another word, and an attempt was made to read the consonants YHWH or JHVH along with the vowels of ᾿Adōnāy; the result was the hybrid form ‘Jehovah’, which was introduced by William Tyndale into English, [Ancient and English Version sof the Bible, pp. 165 f.] where it has become thoroughly naturalized. What the original Hebrew vowels of the name were is a matter of some debate, although it is usually considered that they were a and e, the word being pronounced Yahweh. There is adequate evidence that this was how it was pronounced in the early Christian centuries among the Samaritans and others who did not share the Jewish scruples about uttering it. There is further evidence in the Old Testament that it was also current in the abbreviated forms Yahu and Yah (cf. Psa. 68. 4, R.V.; ‘His name is JAH’).

     Some of the divisions which appear in copies of the Hebrew Bible were fixed by the end of the Masoretic period. The division into verses is quite early; it can be traced back to the early centuries of the Christian era. There were fluctuations of practice with regard to verse division in various centres; the standard division of the Old Testament into verses which has come down to our own day and is found in most translations as well as in the Hebrew original was fixed by the Masoretic family of Ben Asher about A.D. 900. This system divides the thirty-nine books of the Old Testament (as we reckon them) into 23,100 verses. The Hebrew text of the Bible is also divided into paragraphs which correspond to the natural sense; and the Pentateuch bears marks indicating the sections into which it was divided for the purpose of synagogue lessons. There were two such systems―an older one, used in Palestine, which divided the Pentateuch into lessons sufficient to last throughout a three years’ cycle, and a later one, used in Babylonia, dividing the Pentateuch into fifty-four sections to serve as lessons for a one-year cycle. The former sections are called sĕdārīm (singular sēder) and the latter are called pārāshiyyōth (singular pārāshāh). The latter, Babylonian, system finally prevailed and is used to the present time in synagogues throughout the world.

     The division into chapters, on the other hand, is much later, and was first carried through by Cardinal Hugo de Sancto Caro in 1244.

     It may be thought that we have a much slenderer guarantee of the accurate transmission of the Hebrew text of the Old Testament than of the Greek text of the New Testament, in view of the late date of our earliest Hebrew MSS. But the conditions in which the Hebrew text was transmitted give us ground for greater confidence than might be supposed. We have already mentioned the meticulous care which the scribes and Masoretes took to avoid errors in copying. The Masoretes did not disturb the consonantal text which had been handed down to them; they simply added vowel-points, accents, and other signs and notes to aid in the interpretation of the consonantal text and to give guidance in reading it. Although there were no doubt some variations in the text of the MSS, which the Masoretes used, there cannot have been many. The available evidence suggests that there has been little change or variation in the consonantal text since the time of Rabbi Akiba, early in the second century A.D. This is borne out by the Biblical quotations in the Mishnah (c. A.D. 200) and the Gemaras of Palestine (c. A.D. 350) and Babylonia (c. A.D. 500 [See p. 36.]), by the fragments of Origen’s transliteration of the Hebrew in Column 2 of the Hexapla (c. A.D. 240 [See p. 149.]), as also by the character of the text paraphrased or translated in the Aramaic Targums [See pp. 128 ff.] and in the Greek version of Aquila. [See p. 146.]

     About A.D. 400 Jerome translated the Old Testament into Latin directly from Hebrew. [See p. 195.] His translation, together with references made to the original text of Old Testament passages in some of his other writings, is thus a witness to the character of the Hebrew text 500 years before the Masoretes had concluded their work. Still earlier in the Christian era is the Syriac version of the Old Testament which we are to consider in Chapter XV. And from the last three centuries B.C. we have the Greek translation of the Old Testament called the Septuagint. Although, as we shall see in Chapter XII, the Septuagint text sometimes deviates from the Masoretic text and occasionally helps us to correct it, yet in general it confirms that no serious changes were introduced into the text of the Old Testament during the thousand years and more between the time when this translation was made and the time to which our chief Hebrew MSS. belong.

     Yet another witness, so far as the Pentateuch is concerned, is the Samaritan Bible, which is restricted to these five books. As we shall point out in Chapter X, the variations between the Samaritan Pentateuch and the Masoretic edition of these books are quite insignificant by comparison with the area of agreement. It is a matter of dispute when the Jewish and Samaritan editions began to be transmitted separately. It was not later than the fifth century B.C., and may have been considerably earlier; so that the Samaritan Pentateuch carries the evidence for the text of this part of the Hebrew Bible back a century or more before the beginning of the Septuagint version.

     First reports of the roll of Isaiah, which was mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, suggest that it, too, ‘agrees with the Masoretic text to a remarkable degree in wording’.

     [Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, October 1948, pp. 16 f. There are greater differences in spelling and grammatical forms than in actual wording. Like the incomplete Isaiah scroll at the Hebrew University, it shows a noteworthy agreement with the Septuagint at Isa. 53. 11; ‘From the travail of his soul he shall see light’.]

     This is the verdict of Professor Millar Burrows, under whose direction facsimile copies of this scroll and its companions are being prepared.

     [The first volume, reproducing the Isaiah text and the Habakkuk commentary, was published in February, 1950, by the American Schools of Oriental Research.]

     When these are made available to scholars in all lands, further progress will certainly be made in establishing the textual history of the Old Testament. It is amply clear already that these latest discoveries have opened a new chapter in Biblical studies.

     The Westminster Divines, over three hundred years ago, declared that:

     “The Old Testament in Hebrew (which was the native language of the people of God of old), and the New Testament in Greek (which at the time of the writing of it was most generally known to the nations), being immediately inspired by God, and by His singular care and providence kept pure in all ages, are therefore authentical; so as in all controversies of religion, the church is finally to appeal unto them” [Westminster Confession of Faith, I., 7.]

     As regards the Old Testament in Hebrew, our present knowledge gives us even firmer ground than was available to the Westminster Divines for recognizing how the singular providence of God has kept it pure; and later on we shall see that the same can be said for the New Testament in Greek.

Chapter 10—The Samaritan Pentateuch

     The rivalry between Jews and Samaritans was not a growth of yesterday in New Testament times. Its roots run far down into the earliest days of the Israelite settlement in Canaan. The Joseph tribes in Central Canaan were separated from the tribe of Judah in the south by a belt of Canaanite territory, and in particular by the Jebusite fortress of Jerusalem, which did not pass into Israelite hands until the reign of David. The northern and central tribes (collectively called Israel in the narrower sense which excludes Judah) had little to do with Judah until the reign of David. David, himself a member of the tribe of Judah, became king over Judah immediately after the death of King Saul (c. 1010 B.C.) and a few years later, on the death of Saul’s son Ishbaal, he became king over Israel as well. From that time Israel and Judah formed a united monarchy until the end of Solomon’s reign, but even so they were uneasy bedfellows. In David’s reign we read of an abortive attempt by Sheba the son of Bichri to engineer a revolt of the northern portion of the kingdom. His rallying cry is very similar to that which gave the signal for the disruption of the united kingdom after Solomon’s death: ‘We have no portion in David, neither have we inheritance in the son of Jesse: every man to his tents, O Israel’ (2 Samuel 20. 1). And at his call, we read, ‘all the men of Israel went up from following David, and followed Sheba, the son of Bichri: but the men of Judah clave unto their king, from Jordan even to Jerusalem’ (2 Sam. 20. 2). Solomon’s policy of letting Judah off more lightly than Israel in the matter of taxation (1 Kings 4.8-20) helped to accentuate the feeling of cleavage, and when the tribes came to elect their new king after Solomon’s death, it was no difficult matter for Jeroboam to detach Israel from Solomon’s son, Rehoboam, who was left with Judah and the small tribe of Benjamin, which was easily controlled from Jerusalem. The breach remained unhealed. When Omri, king of the northern realm, made Samaria his capital, the name of the capital came to be extended to the country as a whole, which was thus called the kingdom of Samaria, while the term ‘Samaritans’ came to be applied not only to the population of the city but in a wider sense to the population of the whole northern kingdom. In the eighth century B.C. the northern kingdom was incorporated in two stages into the Assyrian Empire. In 732 the territory north of the Plain of Jezreel was overrun by Tiglath-pileser III, and many of its inhabitants were deported to other parts of the Assyrian Empire; eleven years later a similar fate befell the remainder of the kingdom of Israel at the beginning of the reign of the Assyrian king, Sargon II.

     [The siege of Samaria (2 Kings 17. 5) was begun while Shalmaneser V of Assyria was on the throne, but by the time the city was stormed Sargon II (cf. Isa. 20. 1) had superseded him.]

     Sargon tells how he removed 27,290 people from Samaria, and in 2 Kings 17. 24-41 we are told of the colonists whom the Assyrian kings sent to take the place of the deportees, and how they intermarried with the people left in the land. Although these colonists at first worshipped their own gods, they ultimately gave up their idolatrous worship and worshipped Jehovah, as did the native Samaritans.

     [After the fall of Samaria, the Judn kings Hezekiah and Josiah attempted to reunite the northern population with Judah—in a religious unity, at any rate, which is those days could hardly be dissociated from political unity (2 Chron. 30. 1 ff.; 35. 17).]

     In the closing centuries B.C. the Samaritans were as free from idol worship as the Jews.

     Later on, the kingdom of Judah was brought to an end (587 B.C.) by Nebuchadnezzar, king of Babylon, who deported the nobility and large sections of the population of Judah to Mesopotamia. When some of these returned by the permission of the kings of Persia and began to reorganize the Jewish polity, the Samaritans and others who had not gone into exile offered to cooperate with them, but their offer was turned down. Being refused a part in the temple-worship at Jerusalem, the Samaritans, about 400 B.C., built their own temple on Mount Gerizim, near the ancient sanctuary of Shechem. To this temple the woman of Sychar referred when she said to Jesus: ‘Our fathers worshipped in this mountain’ (John 4. 20). The Samaritan worship was condemned by the Jews as schismatic, and though the Samaritans were worshippers of Jehovah, the Jews exaggerated the foreign element in their population by calling them Cutheans (Cuthah being one of the cities from which the Assyrians had sent colonists to Samaria). The Samaritans were confirmed in possession of their temple on Mount Gerizim under Alexander the Great and his successors.

     [To this period (c. i200 B.C.) belong the words of Jesus ben Sira (Ecclesiasticus 50. 25, 26):

               ‘With two nations is my soul vexed,

               And the third is no nation:

               They that sit upon the mountain of Seir, and the Philistines,

               And that foolish part that dwells in Schechem.’]

     When the Hasmoneans [Judas Maccabus and his successors, who ruled Juda till the Romans added it to their empire in 63 B.C.] had established their power in Judah in the middle of the second century B.C., they embarked on a policy of extension northwards. Galilee, in the north of Palestine, with its largely Gentile population, was forcibly Judaized by Aristobulus (104-103 B.C.), and in the first century A.D. the Galileans were in some ways more Jewish than the Jews; but when his father John Hyrcanus overran Samaria, in Central Palestine, and demolished the hated temple on Mount Gerizim, the Samaritans remained Samaritans, and their sentiments towards the Jews grew no more affectionate for the destruction of their temple.

     The Samaritans were relieved of Jewish domination when the Romans established their power in Palestine. They survived as an Israelite group (though repudiated by orthodox Jewry) for many centuries in a variety of centres. To this day a small remnant has survived in Palestine. Until the recent troubles in that land they preserved their ancient traditions and worship at the place now called Nablus, the ancient Shechem; but now, it is reported, they have migrated to the territory of Israel.

     The Samaritans regard the Pentateuch alone as canonical, and they have preserved a text of these five books in Hebrew which has been transmitted independently of the Masoretic text. This may suggest that the Samaritan Pentateuch has an independent history going back to the time when Israel and Judah had no canon apart from the five books of the Law. At any rate, we may safely take it that the Samaritan Pentateuch has come down along a separate line of transmission since the founding of the Gerizim temple about 400 B.C., although one eminent scholar at least, Professor Edward Robertson of Manchester, would trace its separate history as far back as the disruption of the monarchy after Solomon’s death (c. 930 B.C.). [The Period of the Judges (Manchester, 1946).] But even if we accept the later date, it is obviously a most important early witness to the text of the Pentateuch.

     The Samaritan Pentateuch was known to some of the Church Fathers, such as Eusebius and Jerome. Interest in it was revived after the Reformation, and first-hand knowledge of it was brought to Western Europe early in the seventeenth century, when a copy bought from the Samaritan community in Damascus was placed in the library of the Oratory at Paris. In our own islands that great Biblical scholar, Archbishop James Ussher, of Armagh, procured six manuscripts of the Samaritan Pentateuch from the East.     Since those days a number of other copies have reached Western Europe. There are also several in Leningrad, which possesses the largest collection of Samaritan MSS. in Europe. But the most interesting, if not the most important, manuscript of the Samaritan Pentateuch is a parchment roll in the possession of the Samaritans. It appears to have been rediscovered early in the fourteenth century A.D., and must have been written, according to Dr. Kahle, [The Cairo Geniza, p.50.] many centuries before that. But the Samaritans themselves ascribe to it a quite impossible antiquity, for they take literally the words of its colophon (or scribal tailpiece), which makes the remarkable claim:

     ‘I Abisha', [This Abisha’ is the Abishua of 1 Chron. 66. 4, 5, 50; Ezra 7. 5.] son of Phinehas, son of Eleazar, son of Aaron the priest (to them be the favour of the Lord and His glory)—I have written this holy scroll at the gate of the tent of assembly on Mount Gerizim the house of God, in the thirteenth year of the settlement of the children of Israel in the land of Canaan. I thank the Lord’.

     This colophon was probably copied from an earlier manuscript into the manuscript referred to; but what its origin may be is unknown. The Samaritan community possesses other early copies

of the Pentateuch, but this is regarded by them as their chief treasure. Of course, if the claim that it was written by Aaron’s great grandson were true (as they believe), it would lend powerful support to their contention that they, and not the Jews, are in the true succession from Moses and Aaron, that Gerizim, and not Jerusalem, is the place chosen by Jehovah out of all the tribes of Israel to place His name there, and that their recension, and not the Masoretic text, is the true representative of the original copy of the Mosaic Law. Indeed, the colophon was pretty certainly composed in order to vindicate the authenticity of the Samaritan Pentateuch as against the Jewish edition.

     The oldest known codex (as distinct from roll) of the Samaritan Pentateuch is in the University Library, Cambridge, and bears a note saying that it was sold in A.D. 1149-50. Dr. Kahle [Op. cit., p. 50.] says it may have been written some centuries earlier.

     The Samaritan Pentateuch, it is interesting to note, is written in an older form of Hebrew script than that of the Masoretic Bible and Jewish-Hebrew literature in general. Somewhere about

200 B.C. this older script was superseded among the Jews by the Aramaic or ‘square’ character. The script of the Samaritans is of the same general style as the script found on the Moabite Stone, the Siloam Inscription, and the Lachish Letters, but rather more ornamental. [See pp. 31, 35 ff.

     But interesting as the questions of the date and character of the extant MSS. and their script may be, the question of the actual text of the Samaritan Pentateuch is much more important. It has about 6,000 variations from the Masoretic text, and in about 2,000 of these it agrees with the Septuagint. Where the Samaritan and Septuagint texts agree against the Masoretic text, there is a prima facie case in favour of the former.

     [Thus both Samaritan and Septuagint texts agree in reading in Gen. 4. 8: ‘And Cain said unto Abel his brother, Let us go into the field.’ (See p. 151.)

     But most of these variations are small and unimportant. The most important Samaritan variants are those which reveal the fundamental points at issue between the Samaritans and the Jews. The Samaritans liked to emphasize the importance of Shechem and Mount Gerizim; the Jews preferred to tone it down. Thus, where Moses in Deut. 12. 5, etc., speaks of ‘the place which Jehovah your God shall choose’ (later identified by the Jews with Jerusalem), the Samaritan edition makes him say ‘the place which Jehovah your God has chosen’ (meaning Mount Gerizim, which has already been specified in Deut. 11. 29 as the place where the blessings are to be pronounced when the Israelites enter Canaan). In Deut. 27. 4-8, where Moses commands that the stones bearing the words of the Law and an altar of unhewn stones are to be set up on Mount Ebal (according to the Masoretic text), the Samaritan text has Gerizim for Ebal. After the statement of the Ten Commandments in Exod. 20. 2-17 and Deut. 5. 6-21 the Samaritan edition inserts a passage to this effect:

     ‘And it shall be that when Jehovah thy God brings thee into the land of the Canaanite whither thou goest to possess it, thou shalt erect for thyself great stones and shalt plaster them with plaster. And thou shalt write upon the stones all the words of this law. And it shall be that, when ye cross over Jordan, ye shall raise up these stones concerning which I command you this day upon Mount Gerizim. And thou shalt build there an altar to Jehovah thy God, an altar of stones: thou shalt lift up no iron upon them. With whole stones shalt thou build the altar of Jehovah thy God and thou shalt offer upon it burnt offerings to Jehovah thy God. And thou shalt sacrifice peace-offerings and shalt eat there and rejoice before Jehovah thy God. That mountain is across Jordan in the direction of the going down of the sun in the land of the Canaanite that dwells in the Arabah over against Gilgal, beside the terebinth of Moreh, over against Shechem’.

     They made sure work that there should be no mistake about the identification of the mountain!

     Very many instances of variation between the Samaritan and Masoretic texts have to do with matters of grammar and spelling. The Samaritan Pentateuch has a strong tendency to repetition and

expansion. If Moses is told to do something, for instance, and the directions are given in detail, it is not enough for the Samaritan text to say that Moses did all that the Lord commanded him; it must be explicitly recorded that Moses carried out every detail, word for word in accordance with the directions. There are also a number of chronological statements where the Samaritan and Masoretic texts differ; in several of these the Septuagint agrees with the Samaritan account.

     [It is noteworthy tha the Samaritan text alone gives figures in connection with the age of Terah in Gen. 11. 26-32 which present prima facie agreement with the statement of Stephen in Acts 7. 4 (and of Philo in his treatise On the Migration of Abraham, chap. 177) that Abraham left Haran after his father’s death. There are a few other instances of Old Testament quotations or allusions in the New Testament which agree better with the Samaritan than with the Masoretic or Septuagint texts. This does not mean that the New Testament writers used the Samaritan Pentateuch, but that there were forms of the Greek Old Testament known to them which preserved readings similar to those in the Samaritan recension, but which have not survived.]

     When the knowledge of the Samaritan Pentateuch was first brought to Western Europe, the value of the new discovery was over-estimated. Morinus, for example, who first published the Samaritan text in 1632, regarded it as vastly superior to the Masoretic text. Further critical study, however, has established the definite superiority of the Masoretic text. For one thing, the Samaritan scribes do not appear to have exercised the meticulous care in copying and handing on the text that characterized the Masoretes. While in certain details the Samaritans have preserved a true reading lost by the Jewish text (in which case the true reading has usually been preserved by the Septuagint as well), the chief value of the Samaritan Pentateuch is the witness which it bears to the essential purity of the Masoretic text of the first five books of the Bible.

     [Apart from the distinctively Samaritan adaptations, says Dr. Kahle, ‘the Samaritan text is in the main a popular revision of an older text, in which antiquated forms and constructions, not familiar to people of later times, were replaced by forms and constructions easier to be understood, difficulties were removed, parallel passage were inserted’ (The Cario Geniza, pp. 147 f.).]

     In addition to the Samaritan Pentateuch, which is an edition of the original Hebrew, the Samaritans have also preserved a version (or Targum) of the Pentateuch in the Samaritan dialect of Aramaic, dating from the early years of the Christian era, and an Arabic version of the Pentateuch, made about the eleventh or twelfth century. They have other literature as well, including a book of Joshua, based on the canonical Joshua, but not regarded as canonical by the Samaritans themselves, and a chronicle carrying their traditional history from Joshua’s time down into the Christian era. They have preserved their traditional expectation of the Messiah, whom they call the Taheb, or ‘Restorer’; they envisage Him primarily as a second Moses—the one of whom Moses said: ‘Jehovah thy God will raise up unto thee a prophet from the midst of thee, of thy brethren, like unto me; unto him ye shall hearken’ (Deut. 18. 15).

Chapter 11―The Targums

     In Chapter IV we looked at an interpretation of Neh. 8. 8 which suggests that this passage is the oldest reference we have to the custom of giving an oral paraphrase or targum of the Old Testament Scriptures.     The verse runs in the Revised Version: ‘And they read in the book, in the law of God, distinctly (margin, “with an interpretation”); and they gave the sense, so that they understood the reading.’

     Whether this is the true interpretation of this passage or not (and I believe it is) it is true at any rate that the practice of accompanying the public reading of the Scriptures in the synagogues by an oral paraphrase in the Aramaic vernacular grew up in the closing centuries B.C. Naturally, when Hebrew was becoming less and less familiar to the ordinary people as a spoken language, it was necessary that they should be provided with an interpretation of the text of Scripture in a language which they did know, if they were to understand what was read. The official charged with giving this oral paraphrase was called a methurgeman (translator or interpreter) and the paraphrase itself was called a targum.

     [From an old Semitic root: cf. Akkadian targumanu, ‘interpreter,’ ‘translator,’ with modern dragoman.]

     It was probably more than a strict translation, embodying a certain amount of interpretative comment. The methurgeman, we are told, was not allowed to read his interpretation out of a roll, as the congregation might mistakenly think he was reading the original Scriptures. (Compare the way in which people even today attach greater authority to the written than to the spoken word: “I saw it in black and white’, they will say; ‘I have it in print’.) With a view to accuracy, no doubt, it was further laid down that not more than one verse of the Pentateuch and not more than three verses of the Prophets might be translated at one time.

     In due course these Targums were committed to writing. Considering their origin we might expect a high degree of variants among the various translations of any Biblical passage. In the centuries following A.D.100, however, when the text and interpretation of the Hebrew Bible were more definitely fixed, two authoritative Targums appeared, based on the official text and interpretation. One of these was a Targum to the Pentateuch called the Targum of Onkelos;* the other was a Targum to the Prophets (Former and Latter) called the Targum of Jonathan ben Uzziel.

     [* Onkelos seems to be a corrupt form of Aquila, the name of a Jewish translator of the Scriptures into Greek (see p. 146); it was attached to this Aramaic version through a misunderstanding. The error is the less serious, however, in that both Aquila’s Greek translation and the Targum of Onkelos are excessively literal renderings of the Hebrew, carried out in the same spirit.]

     The former was the more important and authoritative, not only because the Pentateuch was invested with peculiar sanctity in the eyes of the Rabbis, but also because it was the only part of the Bible to be read through continuously in the synagogues; the Prophets were not read in their entirety, but only in selected lessons on Sabbaths and festivals.

     [The lessons form the Prophets are called haphtārōth (plural of haphtārāh); they followed the lessons form the Pentateuch. Cf. Acts 13. 15, 27.]

     In addition to these official Targums, which appear in written form among the Babylonian Jews in the fifth century A.D., others of an unofficial character, including a larger element of free comment on the text, circulated among the Jews in the following centuries. Such were the so-called Targum of Pseudo Jonathan on the Pentateuch, the fragmentary Jerusalem Targum on the Pentateuch (consisting of comments on single verses, phrases and words throughout the Pentateuch), and Targums on the ‘Writings’ or Hagiographa.

     [The Samaritans also had an Aramaic Targum of the Pentateuch; no official version of this was issued, however, so that nearly every manuscript of the Samaritan Targum has to some extent its own text.]

     But there were written Targums before those of Onkelos and Jonathan. When we are dealing with translations of sacred books, we regularly find that a fixed and authorized version is preceded

by a number of varying and unofficial efforts.

     We are told of a written Targum of the book of Job which was in existence in the first century A.D.; when it was shown to Gamaliel (the teacher of Paul), he ordered it to be built into the Temple walls, which were not yet completed. As the Temple reached completion in A.D. 63, this gives us a lower limit for the date of this Targum, but we do not know how old it was at this time. Indeed, it was possibly in existence at the time when the Greek (Septuagint) translation of Job was made, for that translation has a note at the end of Job: ‘This is translated from the Syrian book’, which seems to indicate an Aramaic Targum.

     The existence of this Targum on job, for which we have adequate evidence, makes it probable that there were other written Targums even in the pre-Christian period. When the official Targums were published, however, these older Targums would be regarded as obsolete, and their preservation would not be encouraged.

     The Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan, while apparently committed to writing in the fifth century A.D., were authorized versions which conformed to the text of the Hebrew Bible estab lished about A.D. 200 and to the official interpretations of the law codified in the Mishnah. [See p. 36.] But they were not entirely new pieces of work; they would draw largely upon traditional material, while checking and revising it according to the established doctrine of the contemporary leaders in Israel.

     Evidence has been forthcoming in recent years, however, particularly from the Cairo genizah already referred to [See p. 114.] of a Targum on the Pentateuch which circulated in Palestine till as late as the tenth century A.D.

     [See M. Black, An Aramaic Approach to the Gospels and Acts (1946), pp. 18 ff.; P. E. Kahle, The Cairo Geniza, pp. 121 ff.]

     Its language is Palestinian Aramaic of the first century, and therefore excellent evidence for the form of that language known to our Lord and His apostles. It presupposes a Hebrew text of the Pentateuch different in details from the text established at the beginning of the second century, and some of its legal interpretations deviate from those which were fixed in the Mishnah. That this Targum persisted so long in Palestine suggests that the authoritative Targum of Onkelos, which was published in Babylonia, was not introduced into Palestine before the tenth century.

     [By the time Arabic, and no longer Aramaic, was the vernacular of the Palestinians, but the Targum of Onkelos retained its value as an authoritative interpretation of the Pentateuch.]

     The Targum of Onkelos contained little more than straight translation, and very literal translation at that. The old Palestinian Pentateuch Targum contained a good deal of traditional commentary and expansion over and above the bare translation of the Hebrew text. This additional material was not allowed to disappear; the later Targums on the Pentateuch consist of the Targum of Onkelos expanded by much of this old material.

     One marked feature of the Targums is their avoidance of the anthropomorphisms which characterize some references to God in the Hebrew text. One frequent device is the use of the phrase ‘the word of God’ instead of simply ‘God’. Thus in Gen. 3. 8, instead of ‘they heard the voice of the LORD God walking in the garden’, the Targums of Onkelos and Pseudo Jonathan have ‘they heard the voice of the word of the LORD God walking in the garden’. Where the Hebrew text says of Ishmael, ‘God was with the lad’ (Gen. 21. 20), the Targumic equivalent is: ‘the word of God was in aid of the lad’. Edersheim counted 179 occurrences of this Targumic idiom in Onkelos, in 82 of which he considered that the term ‘word’ bore ‘undoubted application to the Divine Personality as revealing Himself’.

     [Life and Times of Jesus the Messiah (1883), Vol. II, pp. 659 ff.]

     In fact, it has often been thought that this Targumic use of the phrase ‘the word of God’ lies behind the concept of the divine Word (Gk. logos) which we find in the opening verses of John’s Gospel. This is not certain, however. The Aramaic term used in this kind of context (mēmrā) is not that used by the Targums in places where the Hebrew text itself refers to the activity of the Word of God, such as Psa. 33. 6; 107. 20; Isa. 55. 11. These and similar passages certainly provide a background of thought to the Johannine doctrine.

     [As also does the personified Wisdom of God in such a passage as Prov. 8. 22 ff.]

     The mēmrā of God in the Targums, on the other hand, is held by some competent scholars to be simply a verbal expedient for avoiding the ascription of anthropomorphic activity or experience to God.     But even if this was the original purpose of this expression, its very use was bound to lead to other interpretations. A Jewish scholar, J. Abelson, has declared that the idea of the mēmrā ‘has a deep and real theological import’, and he quotes the philosopher, Nachmanides (1194-1270), as saying of expressions containing the term mēmrā that ‘their secret is known to students’.

     [The Immanence of God in Rabbinic Literature (1912), pp. 147, 151; quoted by L. Gillet, Communion in the Messiah (1942), p. 79. For the contrary view, that the ‘Word of God’ in the Targums is simply a reverent circumlocution for ‘God,’ see G. F. Moore, Judaism, Vol. l, pp. 414 ff.]

     Where experts disagree it is wise not to make rash assertions, but there is a remarkable verbal background, at least, to the statement of John 1. 14 that ‘the Word became flesh, and dwelt among us, and we beheld his glory’. For in that statement we have three terms, and not only one, which are used in the Targums as substitutes for the bare name of God. One is the term ‘Word’ (Gk. logos), corresponding verbally at any rate to mēmrā. Then, when the Word is said to have ‘dwelt among us’, the expression used (Gk. eskēnōsen) is closely connected with the thought of the divine presence which was manifested upon the tabernacle in the wilderness―the shĕkhīnā (from a Semitic root meaning ‘to dwell’, ‘to abide’). And thirdly we have the word ‘glory’ (Gk. doxa), corresponding to Aramaic yeqārā. As mēmrā , shĕkhīnā and yeqārā are all used in the Targums in connection with the divine activity, it looks as if John is insisting that all the forms or expressions of divine manifestation in Old Testament times―Word, Abiding Presence, Glory―are summed up and fulfilled in Jesus.

     Some examples of the circumlocutionary use of shekhina may be given here. Gen. 9. 27 (‘let him dwell in the tents of Shem’, understood of God) runs in Onkelos: ‘The shekhina will dwell in the tents of Shem’. ‘Is the LORD among us or not?’ (Exod. 17. 7) becomes ‘Is the shekhina of the LORD among us or not?’ Deut. 3. 24 (‘what god is there in heaven or in earth?’) becomes ‘Thou art God; Thy shekhina is in heaven above and reigns on earth below’.     ‘The good will of Him that dwelt in the bush’ (Deut. 33. 16) is expanded to ‘the good will of him whose shekhina is in heaven and who revealed Himself in the bush to Moses’.

     The term ‘glory’ is similarly used, and may be illustrated by the following quotations: ‘the glory of God went up from Abraham’ (Gen. 17. 22, for ‘God went up from Abraham’); ‘the mountain upon which the glory was revealed’ (Exod. 3. 1, for ‘the mountain of God’); ‘they saw the glory of the God of Israel’ [The Septuagint also modifies the original text, rendering it: ‘they saw the place where the God of Israel stood.’] (Exod. 24. 10, for ‘they saw the God of Israel’); ‘I saw the glory of the Lord’ (Isa. 6. 1, for ‘I saw the Lord’).

     The last passage quoted is particularly interesting, because it is alluded to in the New Testament (John 12. 41) in language which reflects the Targumic paraphrase: ‘These things said Isaiah because he saw His glory’. (Note, too, that John takes ‘His glory’ to refer to Christ, in keeping with what we said about John 1. 14.) There is another passage from the same chapter of Isaiah which is quoted in the New Testament in a form resembling the Targum. This is Isa. 6. 9, 10, as quoted in Mark 4. 12. The closing words of the quotation in Mark (‘and it should be forgiven them’) appear neither in the Masoretic Hebrew nor in the Greek Septuagint, but they are exactly the words used in the Targum of Jonathan. (As we have said, the Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan contain material much earlier than the dates at which they were written and published.) And thus certain point of contact between the quotation and the Targumic text encourages us to interpret in the light of the Targum another part of the quotation (namely, the construction with hina, mentioned on p. 66).

     In Eph. 4. 8 Paul quotes Psa. 68. 18 with the words ‘He ... gave gifts unto men’, whereas the Masoretic and Septuagint texts have ‘Thou hast received gifts among men’, which means something

else. The change from ‘Thou’ to ‘He’ is insignificant, because Paul is in any case referring to Christ in the third person in this context; but the change from ‘received’ to ‘gave’ is obviously significant, because ‘gave’ suits Paul’s argument as ‘received’ would not. It is remarkable to find that the Targum on the Psalms gives the passage in a form like Paul’s; it runs: ‘Thou hast ascended to the firmament [prophet Moses], thou hast led captivity captive, [thou hast taught the words of the law,] thou hast given gifts to men.’ The words within square brackets represent Rabbinical exposition, possibly of a later date; but the actual words of the text, including the important clause at the end, represent an earlier oral Targum. The Syriac (Peshitta) version of the Old Testament, [See p. 183.] which belongs to the early years of the Christian era, has practically the same reading as the Targum, omitting the phrases which we have bracketed.

     Dr. Black points out the similarity between Luke 6. 36, ‘Be ye merciful, even as your Father is merciful’, and an expansion in the Pseudo Jonathan Targum of Lev. 22. 28, ‘As our Father is merciful in heaven, so be ye merciful on earth’. It is also interesting that the form of this saying in the Matthaean version (Matt. 5. 48: ‘Ye therefore shall be perfect, as your heavenly Father is perfect’) has a contact with the paraphrase of the preceding verse of Leviticus (22. 27) in this Targum, where ‘the virtue of the perfect man’ is mentioned. [M. Black, An ramaic Approach tohte Gospels and Acts, pap. 138 f.] A thorough study of Old Testament quotations and allusions in the New in the light of the Targums might lead to some interesting results.

     A few quotations from the Targums in translation will do more than any general description to indicate their character. First, we give the closing verses of Gen. 3 according to the Onkelos Targum and then according to the expansive Targum of Pseudo-Jonathan.

     Genesis 3. 21-24 (Onkelos):

     ‘And the Lord God made unto Adam and his wife garments of glory,** on the skin of their flesh, and clothed them. And the Lord God said, Behold, Adam is the only one in the world knowing good and evil; perchance now he might stretch out his hand and take also from the tree of life, and eat, and live for ever. And the Lord God sent him from the garden of Eden, to till the earth whence he was created. And He drove out Adam; and He laced before the garden of Eden the cherubim and the sharp sword, which turns to guard the way to the tree of life.’

     Genesis 3. 21-24 (Pseudo-Jonathan):

     ‘And the Lord God made unto Adam and his wife garments of honour, from the skin of the serpent which He had stripped from it, on the skin of their flesh, instead of the beauty which they had cast off; and he clothed them. And the Lord God [The fragmentary Jerusalem Targum has ‘And the word of the Lord God said . . .’] said to the angels that were ministering before Him Lo! There is Adam alone on the earth as I am alone in the highest heavens, and there will spring from him those who know to distinguish between good and evil: if he had kept the commandment which I commanded, he would have been living and lasting, like the tree of life, for evermore. Now, since he has not kept what I commanded, we decree against him and expel him from the garden of Eden, before he may stretch out his hand and take from the fruits of the tree of life; for if he ate therefrom he would live and remain for ever. And the Lord God expelled him from the garden of Eden, and he went and settled on Mount Moriah, to till the earth whence he was created. And He drove out Adam from where He had made the glory of His shekhina to reside from the beginning, [The fragmentary Targum adds, ‘at the east of the garden of Eden.’] between the two cherubim. Before He created the world [The fragmentary Targum says ‘two thousand years before the world waas crated.’] He created the Law; He prepared the garden of Eden for the righteous, that they shall eat and delight in the fruits of the tree, because they have acted during their life according to the teaching of the Law in this world, and have kept its commandments: He prepared Gehenna for the wicked, which is likened to a sharp sword that eats from two sides; He prepared within it sparks of light and coals of fire to consume therewith the wicked who rebelled in their lives against the teaching of the Law. Better is this Law to him who acts according to it than the fruits of the tree of life, [The fragmentary Targum says, ‘Because the tree of life, that is the Law.’] for the word of the Lord has prepared for him who keeps it, that he shall live and walk in the paths of the way of the life of the age to come.’

     The expansions in the later Targums are interesting, not for any real additional information which they give us about the events with which the Scriptures deal, but because of the light they throw on Jewish traditions and methods of exegesis.

     [‘Since they were used in worship, their character was necessarily exegetical, and they vary from an almost exact transcript of the Hebrew text into Aramaic to a homiletic discourse in which imagination played a large part. In the greater part of Judges, for example, the rendering is fairly close to the Massoretic text, but the Song of Deborah is largely allegorized, and presents a picture which recalls a rabbinic school rather than a battlefield’ (T. H. Robinson, in Ancient and English Versions of the Bible [ed. H. W. Robinson, 1940], pp. 96 f).]

     Here is a further example―the first chapter of Ruth as it appears in the late Targum on the Hagiographa.

     Ruth 1. 1-22:

     ‘And it came to pass in the days when the judges judged that there was a mighty famine in the land of Israel. Ten mighty famines have been decreed by heaven to be in the world from the

day the world was created until King Messiah comes, to punish the inhabitants of the earth therewith: the first famine in the days of Adam, the second famine in the days of Lamech, the third famine in the days of Abraham, the fourth famine in the days of Isaac, the fifth famine in the days of Jacob, the sixth famine in the days of Boaz (who is called Ibzan the righteous) of BethlehemJudah, the seventh famine in the days of David, king of Israel, the eighth famine in the days of the prophet Elijah, the ninth famine in the days of Elisha in Samaria; the tenth famine will not be a famine for eating bread nor yet a thirst for drinking water, but for hearing the word of prophecy from the presence of the Lord. [Cf. Amos. 8. 11.]

     And when there was that mighty famine in the land of Israel, a certain great man of Bethlehem Judah departed and went to sojourn in the country of Moab, he, and his wife, and his two sons. And the name of the man was Elimelech, and the name of his wife Naomi, and the name of his two sons Mahlon and Chilion, chief Ephrathites of Bethlehem Judah. And they came into the country of Moab and were governors there. And Elimelech, Naomi’s husband, died, and she was left a widow, and her two sons orphans. And they transgressed the commandment of the word of the Lord and took them foreign wives of the daughters of Moab; the name of the one was Orpah, and the name of the other Ruth, the daughter of Eglon, king of Moab: and they dwelt there about ten years. And because they transgressed the commandment of the word of the Lord and made affinity with foreign peoples, their days were shortened, and Mahlon and Chilion died also, both of them in the polluted land, and the woman was left bereaved of her two sons and widowed of her husband.

     Then she arose, she and her daughters-in-law, and returned from the land of Moab, because she was told in the land of Moab by the mouth of the messenger that the Lord had remembered His people, the house of Israel, to give them bread, because of the justice of Ibzan the judge and the prayer which he prayed before the Lord: the same is Boaz the righteous. And she departed from the place where she had been, and her two daughters-in-law with her.

     And Naomi said to her two daughters-in-law: Go, return each to her mother’s house: may the Lord deal kindly with you as you have dealt with your dead husbands (in that you have refused to take husbands after their deaths) and with me (in that you have nourished and sustained me). The Lord give you a full reward for the kindness which you have shown to me, and through this reward may you find rest, each one for herself in her husband’s house. And she kissed them, and they lifted up their voices and wept. And they said to her: We will not return to our people and to our gods, [Literally ‘fear(s)’.] but rather will we return with you to your people to be sojourners. [In the period when the Targums were composed this would mean not merely ‘sojourners’ but ‘proselytes.’] And Naomi said: Turn back, my daughters; why will you go with me? Have I even yet sons in my womb, that they may be husbands for you? Turn back, my daughters, from following me; go to your people, for I am too old to be married to a husband.     If I said (as if I were yet a young woman), I have still hope; if I were married tonight to a husband and were yet to bear sons; would you perhaps wait for them until they grew up like the woman who waits for a little brother-in-law to marry him: [A reference to the levirate marriage; compare Tamar’s waiting for Shelah in Gen. 38. 11.] for their sakes would you sit pining so as not to be married to a husband? I pray you, my daughters, do not grieve my soul; for it is much more grievous for me than for you, because a stroke from the presence of the Lord has gone forth against me. And they lifted up their voice and wept again, and Orpah kissed her mother-in-law, but Ruth stuck to her. And she said: See, your sister-in-law has returned to her people and to her god; [[Literally ‘fear(s)’.] go back after your sister-in-law to your people and to your god. And Ruth said: Do not urge me to leave you, to turn back from following you, for I wish to become a sojourner. [Here the following conversation makes it clear that ‘sojourner’ means ‘proselyte.’] Naomi said: We are commanded to keep the sabbaths and the holy days, so as not to walk more than 2000 cubits. [A Sabbath day’s journey; the distance was computed by interpreting Exod. 16. 29 in the light of Num. 35. 5.]

     Ruth said: Wherever you go, I will go. Naomi said: We are commanded not to lodge together with the Gentiles. Ruth said: Wherever you lodge, I will lodge. Naomi said: We are commanded to keep the 613 precepts.

     [The Rabbis calculated that the Law consisted of 613 precepts―365 being negative (one for every day in the year),a nd 248 being positive (one for every part of the body).]

     Ruth said Whatever your people observe, I myself will observe, as if this had been my nation formerly. Naomi said: We are commanded not to engage in strange worship. Ruth said: Your God shall be my God. Naomi said: We have four kinds of capital punishment for sinners: pelting with stones, burning with fire, slaying with the sword, and hanging on the gallows. Ruth said: Wherever you die, I will die. Naomi said: We have a sepulchre. Ruth said: And there will I be buried. Then she finished by saying: So may the Lord do to me and so may He add to me if aught but death part you and me. So Naomi saw that she was bent on going with her, and she stopped speaking to her.

     So they two went on till they came to Bethlehem; and so it was, when they came to Bethlehem, that all the inhabitants of the city went tumultuously to meet them, and said: Is this Naomi? And she said to them: Do not call me Naomi; call me Bitter of Soul, because Shadday has dealt very bitterly with me. I went out full with my husband and my sons, and the Lord has brought me back empty of them; why, then, do you call me Naomi, when testimony has been borne against me from the presence of the Lord for my trespass, and Shadday has afflicted me?

     So Naomi returned, and Ruth the Moabitess, her daughter-in-law, with her, who returned from the land of Moab, and they came to Bethlehem at the commencement of the day of Passover; and on that day the children of Israel began to cut the sheaf of elevation, which was of barley.’

     The Targum, it will be seen, dotted the i’s and crossed the t’s of the Biblical narrative, making sure in particular that it would be understood in accordance with the tradition of the elders. Apart from the religious interest, notice how the characters in the story become more important personages; Elimelech and his family were chief Ephrathites of Bethlehem and became governors in Moab; Boaz is identified with Ibzan, one of the minor judges, because he, too, was a Bethlehemite (Judges 12. 8), while Ruth turns out to have been the daughter of Eglon king of Moab (Judges 3. 12 ff)!

     Our last selection will be from the Targum of Jonathan on the Prophets, and the passage is one of special interest, as it is the Targum of the great prophecy of the Suffering Servant (Isa. 52. 13-53. 12).

     Isaiah 52. 13-53. 12:

     (52. 13) ‘Behold, my servant Messiah [The Servant of the Lord is called Messiah in this Targum, also in Isaiah 42. 1 and 43. 10.] will prosper; he will be high and will flourish and be very powerful. (14) As the house of Israel hoped for him many days when their appearance was diminished among the nations and their countenance more than the sons of men, (15) so will he scatter many nations: kings will keep silence over him and place their hands upon their mouths, because what was not told them they have seen, and they have perceived what they had not heard.

     (53. 1) Who has believed these tidings of ours, and upon whom has the strength of the Lord’s mighty arm now been revealed? (2) And see: the righteous one will grow up before Him like blossoming shoots, and like a tree which sends forth its roots by streams of water, so will the holy generation flourish in the land which was in need of him. His appearance is not that of any common man, nor is his awe the awe inspired by an ordinary person; and a countenance of holiness is his countenance, which all who see him will look earnestly upon. (3) Then he will be an object of contempt, and the glory of the kingdom will be interrupted; see, they will be weak and sad, like a man suffering pain and appointed to afflictions; contemned and disregarded, as though the face of the shekhina had departed from us.

     (4) Then for our trespasses he will make entreaty and for his sake our iniquities will be forgiven; though we were considered as crushed, stricken from the presence of the Lord and humbled. (5) And he will build the sanctuary which was profaned by our trespasses and betrayed by our iniquities, and by his instruction peace will flourish upon us, and when we follow his words our trespasses will be forgiven us. (6) All we like sheep had been scattered, each one according to his way had we gone astray, and there was good pleasure from the presence of the Lord [See footnote 1 [***]on following page.] to forgive the trespasses of us all for his sake.

     (7) He prayed and was answered; and before he opened his mouth he was accepted; the strong nations he will deliver up like a lamb for the slaughter, and like a ewe which before her shearers is dumb, so before him none opens his mouth or utters a word. (8) From prison and from punishment he will bring our captives, and the wonders which will be done for us in his days who will be able to relate? Because he will remove the dominion of the nations out of the land of Israel, the trespasses wherein my people trespassed he will transfer to them. (9) And he will deliver up the wicked to Gehenna, and the oppressors, rich in possessions, to the death of destruction, so that those who commit sin may not be established nor speak deceitful things with their mouths.

     (10) And there was good pleasure from the presence of the Lord *** to purify and cleanse the remnant of His people in order to purge their souls from trespasses: they see the kingdom of their Messiah, they will multiply sons and daughters, they will prolong their days, and those who do the law of the Lord will prosper in His good pleasure.

     [This circumlocutory Aramaism for ‘the Lord was pleased,’ or ‘it was the lord’s will,’ underlies the Greek of Matt. 18. 14, which runs literally: ‘there is not will in the presence of your Father in heaven that one of these little ones should perish.’]

     (11) From the servitude of the nations he will deliver their soul; they will see the punishment of their enemies; they will be satisfied with the booty of their kings. By his wisdom he will justify the righteous, in order to bring many into subjection to the Law, and for their trespasses he will make entreaty. (12) Therefore I will apportion to him the booty of many nations, and the wealth of strong cities will he apportion as plunder, because he delivered up his soul to death, † and the rebels he brought into subjection to the law, and he will make entreaty for many trespasses, and the rebels will be forgiven for his sake.’††

     [†R. A. Aytoun thinks this is the one clause in the Targum which ascribes suffering to the Messiah (Journal of Theological Studies, 23 [1922], p. 177). C. R. North, however, thinks the view of Dalman and Seidelin is more probable, that the clause is idiomatic Aramaic for ‘he exposed himself to the risk of death’ (The Suffering Servant [1948], pp. 11 f.).

     [††A convenient edition (text and translation) of The Targum of Isiah has just been produced by J. F. Stenning (Oxforde, 1949).]

     The most interesting feature of this Targumic passage is that, while the Servant is clearly identified with the Messiah, all the ascriptions of suffering to Him are transferred either to the Jewish people suffering at the hand of their Gentile oppressors or to the Gentiles receiving retribution at the hand of Messiah. There is little or no evidence that anyone attributed the sufferings to the Messiah before the coming of Christ.

     [The words of John the Baptist: ‘Behold the Lamb of God which taketh away the sin of the world’ (John 1. 29), are probably based on Isa. 53, and on an interpretation of it which attributed the sufferings to the Messiah. But they were not spoken, of course, before the coming of Christ. John the Baptist, being a prophet himself, knew what the prophet’s words meant. No other Old Testament passage has so profoundly influenced the whole New Testament picture of the work of Christ as this ‘Golden Passional.’]

     But the words addressed to Him at His baptism combined the Messianic idea (‘Thou art My Son’, Psa. 2. 7) with that of the obedient Servant (‘My beloved in whom I am well pleased’, Isa. 42. 1). Jesus understood, accepted and fulfilled the role of Messiah as one involving sufferings first and glory thereafter. The tradition preserved in the Targum, while it identifies the Servant with Messiah, interprets His role as that of a champion of Israel against the Gentiles. If this was the view current in the first century, we can understand how the proclamation of a suffering and crucified Messiah was a stumbling block to the Jews.     The Targums thus provide us with valuable background material for the reading of the New Testament.

     [The sort of interpretation which the Targums provide, over and above the bare translation, is what the Jews call midrāsh. It may be either logical and legal in character (hălākhāh) or anecdotal and popularly homiletic (haggādāh). The term midrāsh is also applied to a number of systematic commentaries on various parts of Scripture.]

Chapter 12―The Old Testament in Greek

     The writer remembers being present once at a conference of theologians, where one of the subjects debated was the nature of true theology. One eminent speaker declared on the first day of the conference: ‘A man can be a good theologian even if he knows nothing but the Authorized Version of the Bible’.     Another speaker, who arrived later and so did not hear this dictum, read a paper on the second day in the course of which he said: ‘I would not call a man a theologian unless he could translate from the Septuagint back into Hebrew’. As someone else would have said had he been present: ‘It all depends on what you mean by a theologian’. This is not what we are going to consider now, but perhaps the present chapter will suggest to the reader some of the reasons which led the second speaker to attach such high value to the Septuagint.

     What, then, is the Septuagint?      The term itself comes from the Latin word for ‘seventy’, septuaginta, and it is frequently indicated by the Roman numeral sign LXX. The origin of the name is to be found in an ancient document known as the Letter of Aristeas. This document belongs to the years around 100 B.C., but it purports to have been written over a century and a half earlier by Aristeas, an official at the court of King Ptolemy Philadelphus, of Egypt (285-246 B.C.), to his brother, Philocrates. Ptolemy was renowned as a patron of literature and it was under him that the great library at Alexandria, one of the world’s cultural wonders for 900 years, was inaugurated. The letter describes how Demetrius of Phalerum, said to have been Ptolemy’s librarian, aroused the king’s interest in the Jewish Law and advised him to send a delegation to the high priest, Eleazar, at Jerusalem. The high priest chose as translators six elders from each of the twelve tribes of Israel and sent them to Alexandria, along with a specially accurate and beautiful parchment of the Torah. The elders were royally dined and wined, and proved their wisdom in debate; then they took up their residence in a house on the island of Pharos (the island otherwise famed for its lighthouse), where in seventy-two days they completed their task of translating the Pentateuch into Greek, presenting an agreed version as the result of conference and comparison.

     [Later writers improved on this account by telling how the 72 translators did their work in separate cells, and how after 72 days all their version swere found to coincide ex actly―sufficient proof of the divine inspiration fo the work!]

     This story explains the name ‘Septuagint’ applied to this version,* but it was not written to explain a name but to place the stamp of authority upon a translation. To understand why this was necessary we must look farther back in history.

     [*Note that primarily the term “Septuagint’ applies to the Pentateuch only; it was at the time of Origen (early 3rd cent. A.D.) that it came to denote, as it denotes now, the whole Old Testament in Greek.]

     We read in the book of Jeremiah (chapters 41 to 44) of a large number of the inhabitants of Judah who went down to Egypt to settle there three or four months after the destruction of Jerusalem and the Temple by the armies of Nebuchadnezzar (587 B.C.). From that time to the present day Egypt has never been without a Jewish colony. About the same time as the migration in which Jeremiah was forced to take part, a king of Egypt settled a garrison of Jews on the southern frontier of his kingdom, at Elephantine, at the first cataract of the Nile. If they were not members of the group that went down with Jeremiah, they were their fellow countrymen.     This military colony flourished at Elephantine, and built a temple there some time before 525 B .C. {See pp. 52 ff.]

     But the heyday of Jewish colonization in Egypt dawned when Alexander the Great founded Alexandria in 332 B. C. Practically from the first, Jews formed a very important element in the population of this great commercial and cultural capital. Most of the members of the Ptolemy dynasty, which fell heir to Alexander’s Empire in Egypt and the neighbouring territories and had its seat of government at Alexandria, favoured the Jews and assigned them a special quarter of Alexandria. By the early years of the Christian era we are told that there were almost a million Jews in Egypt, that two out of the five wards of Alexandria were known as Jewish districts, and that others were scattered throughout the remaining three wards.

     Alexandria was from the start a Greek-speaking city, and its Jewish population soon forgot their Palestinian vernacular and came to speak exclusively in Greek.

     If these people were to make any use of the Hebrew Bible, it must be in a translation. A Greek Targum was as necessary in Alexandria as an Aramaic Targum was in Palestine and Babylonia. And the internal evidence of the Septuagint suggests that this Greek version of the Old Testament was made in the first instance to meet the requirements of the Jewish population of Alexandria, and not to grace the royal library. That a copy ultimately found its way into the royal library is quite likely, but that is another matter.

     The exact circumstances under which the Septuagint translation began to be made are unknown. The various ancient reports agree in saying that it was made in Alexandria, and that it was

begun in the third century B.C., and this is borne out by the character of the work. The language suggests that the translators were Egyptian Jews, and quotations from the Septuagint text of Genesis and Exodus appear in Greek literature before 200 B.C.

     When we are dealing with an ancient work in the language in which it was written, we endeavour by the methods of textual criticism to arrive as nearly as possible at the text of the original document. But in dealing with translations we may have to adopt a quite different procedure. If the translation was an official one from the start, then we can make it our business to determine the original text of the official translation. But the fact is that the official translation very often lies at the end and not at the beginning of the history of the translation of a document from another language. We shall see in Chapter XVI, for instance, that Jerome’s Latin version of the Bible, which became the ‘Authorized Version’ of Western Christendom, was preceded by a large number of individual and unofficial attempts at translation. The evidence suggests that this was so with the Greek translation of the Old Testament. Some of the extant manuscripts of the Septuagint exhibit texts of certain portions of the Old Testament varying from one another to such an extent that they cannot have been derived from a single archetype by the ordinary chances of scribal corruption and so forth. They represent varying translations from Hebrew into Greek. In the first century A.D. the evidence of quotations from the Greek Bible in authors like Josephus, Philo of Alexandria, and some New Testament writers, points to the existence at that time of variant Greek translations.

     Such a state of affairs is unsatisfactory, and we can trace a number of attempts to give official status to one particular form of the Greek text of the Old Testament. The earliest of these attempts was closely connected with the Letter of Aristeas. Of all the Old Testament, the most important section in the eyes of Jews after the return from the Babylonian exile was the Pentateuch. The Pentateuch, as distinct from the rest of the Old Testament, was read straight through in the synagogue Sabbath by Sabbath, according to a triennial lectionary cycle, whereas only selections from other parts of the Old Testament were read in public. It must have seemed highly desirable to the leaders of Alexandrian Jewry that there should be one standard Greek version of the Pentateuch, instead of a number of unofficial versions differing from each other.

     Dr. Kahle has argued convincingly [The Cairo Geniza, pp. 132 ff.] that it was to invest a new standard version with the necessary authority in the eyes of the people that the Letter of Aristeas was written. For it is plain from the wording of that Letter that the Greek version of the Pentateuch which it celebrates was intended to supersede previously existing versions which were regarded as inadequate. It represents Demetrius of Phalerum as writing to King Ptolemy:

     ‘Since Your Majesty has given orders for the collection of those books which are lacking to complete the library.... I report to you as follows: The books of the law of the Jews are lacking, together with a few others. For they are composed in Hebrew letters and language, and have been interpreted rather carelessly and not in accordance with the actual sense, as is reported by those who know; for they have not received royal attention’.

     And later in the letter we read that some earlier Greek writers had quoted from the Jewish law, but had come to grief because they used ‘the earlier translations which were rather precarious’.

     Dr. Kahle’s conclusion is that the standard version of the Greek Pentateuch, intended to supersede these earlier translations which were deficient in accuracy, was made about 100 B.C.,** that the Letter of Aristeas was written to give it the requisite prestige and that the enterprise proved successful in the long run, although some variant translations continued to be used for a considerable time afterwards.

     [**If this dating is right, then the fragmentary papyrus of Deut. 25-28 in Greek in the Rylands Library, Manchester, dated about the middle of the second century B.C., exhibits a text older than this standard version of the Pentateuch. See C. H. Roberts, Two Biblical Papyri in the John Rylands Library, Manchester (1936).]

     Like our English Authorized Version, it was a revision of earlier translations, incorporating their good features, correcting their defects, and ultimately superseding them because of its inherent worth.

     The Pentateuch seems to have been the only part of the Greek Old Testament of which a standard text was established by Jewish authorities. The Jews might have gone on at a later time to produce a standard text of the rest of the Septuagint, but for reasons which will be mentioned below, they lost interest in the Septuagint altogether. With the most fragmentary exceptions, every manuscript of the Septuagint which has come down to our day was copied and preserved in Christian, not Jewish, circles. [This is not the only Jewish work which has been preserved by Christians. The same applies to the writings of Philo and Josephus.]

     There were two main reasons why the Jews lost interest in the Septuagint. One was that from the first century A.D. onwards the Christians adopted it as their version of the Old Testament, and used it freely in their propagation and defence of the Christian faith. It is little wonder that Christians came to attach some degree of divine inspiration to the Septuagint, for some of its translations might almost appear to have been providentially intended to support Christian arguments. The use which Christians made of it can be traced in several New Testament passages. One example is the quotation from Amos 9. 11, 12 in James’s speech in Acts 15. 16-18, where the Septuagint version differs considerably from the Masoretic Hebrew text of Amos (represented in our English Old Testament), and where the Septuagint gives more explicit support to James’s argument than the Masoretic text does.

     [The LXX version, quoted by James, presupposes Heb. yidrĕshu (‘will seek’) for Masoretic yirĕshu (‘will possess’), and ᾿ādām ('man') for ᾿Edōm; and it neglects the particle ᾿eth, the mark of the accusative case, which precedes shĕ ērīth (‘remnant’). But the LXX version must represent a variant Hebrew text which has disappeared; and, as C. C. Torrey points out, even the Masoretic text would have served James’s purpose (if not with the same explicitness), since it predicts that the Messianic community will ‘gain possession of all the nations which are called by the name of the God of Israel’ (Composition and Date of Acts [1916], pp. 38 f).]

     But it is when we go on to the second century that we realize what an armoury of textual ammunition for disputes against the Jews Christian apologists found in the Septuagint. If we read Justin Martyr’s Dialogue with Trypho the Jew (the setting of which is at Ephesus shortly after A.D. 135), we find there a good example of this. Trypho on occasion demurs to Justin’s quotations from the Septuagint, on the ground that it does not properly represent the Hebrew text; Justin replies that the Rabbis have obviously altered the Hebrew in order to obscure the correspondence between the prophecy and its fulfilment. For example, Justin quotes Psalm 96. 10 in the form, ‘Say among the nations that the Lord reigned from the tree’, and charges the Jews with having cut out the words ‘from the tree’ so as to remove a reference to the crucifixion. Trypho answers: ‘Whether the rulers of the people have erased any portion of the Scriptures, as you affirm, God knows; but it seems incredible’.

     [Dialogue, chap. 73; cf. Justin’s First Apology, chap. 41. The phrase is not present in any copy of the LXX which has come down to us. It may have found its way into the Septuagint texts on which Justin relied from the ‘Epistle of Barnabas’, viii. 5: ‘The kingdom of Christ (or the reign of Christ) is on the tree.’]

     Trypho was right, in fact; the phrase ‘from the tree’, was not omitted by Jews, but added by Christians.

     Another reason for the Jews’ loss of interest in the Septuagint lies in the fact that about A.D. 100 a revised standard text was established for the Hebrew Bible by Jewish scholars, in the first instance for the Pentateuch and later for the other Old Testament books. This was the beginning of the process of revision and editing which lasted for several centuries and resulted in the production of the Masoretec text. The standard text fixed about A.D. 100 was the consonantal text which formed the basis of the Masoretes’ labours. Variant forms of the Hebrew text which had existed before A.D. 100 were allowed to disappear, with the exception of the Samaritan Pentateuch which was preserved outside Jewish circles. But when this authorized text was fixed, any version in another language which was to be fit for Jewish use must conform to it, and this the existing forms of the Greek version plainly did not.      So here was a further reason for repudiating the Septuagint, and the version which had once been officially authorized by Alexandrian Jewry and protected from alteration by the most solemn sanctions, the version which Philo regarded as written by inspiration, was now represented as the work of Satan; ‘the accursed day on which the seventy elders wrote the Law in Greek for the king’ was compared to the day on which Israel had made the golden calf.

     A new translation of the Bible into Greek was required for Greek-speaking Jews, and this translation was provided by a man named Aquila. We are told by the fourth-century writer, Epiphanius, that Aquila was a relative of the Emperor Hadrian, a native of Sinope, on the Black Sea, who came to Jerusalem as a civil servant. There he became a Christian, but his inadequate emancipation from some of his pre-Christian ideas and ways brought upon him a public rebuke from the elders of the Church. Aquila thereupon took offence, left the Church, and became a Jewish proselyte. Most of this story is probably fictitious, but that he was a Jewish proselyte from the Black Sea coast is confirmed by earlier and more trustworthy writers, and the evidence suggests that he flourished in the first half of the second century A.D.

     His translation not only followed the newly established Hebrew text but did so with such slavish literalness that it could hardly be called Greek: the individual words were Greek, but they were put together according to the rules of Hebrew composition. One interesting feature of his translation is that in Isaiah 7. 14 he translated Heb. ‘almāh*** by Gk. neanis, ‘young woman’, and not by parthenos, ‘maiden’, ‘virgin’.

     [***While ‘almāh is strictly ‘young woman’, and bĕthūlāh is strictly ‘virgin’, in Hebrew, yet in the Old Testament ‘almāh, which occurs seven times, does not seem to be used in a markedly different way from bĕthūlāh, which occurs fifty times.]

     The Septuagint translation was parthenos, which suited the Christian interpretation of this passage as a prophecy of the virginal conception of Christ (as in Matt. 1. 23). The replacement of parthenos by neanis in the later Greek versions blunted the point of this application.

     Towards the end of the second century A.D. another Jewish proselyte, Theodotion, a native of Ephesus, produced another Greek version of the Old Testament.     This was not an original work; what Theodotion seems to have done is to have taken an older Greek translation belonging to the pre-Christian era―one, indeed, which appears to lie behind some of the Old Testament quotations in the New Testament, particularly in Revelation―and revised it in accordance with the standard Hebrew text. It is interesting to note that it was Theodotion’s version of Daniel that the Church adopted for purposes of its standard version of the Greek Bible, and not the older version commonly called the Septuagint version of that book. The reason for this was probably the simple fact that in the book of Daniel Theodotion’s translation is much the more satisfactory of the two.

     The ‘Septuagint’ translation of Daniel is extant only in two manuscripts―the cursive 87, in the Chigi library in Rome (9th or 11th cent. A.D.) and one of the papyrus codices in the Chester Beatty Collection (3rd cent. A.D.). It is also possible that the relation between 1 Esdras in the Septuagint (=1 Esdras in the English Apocrypha) and 2 Esdras in the Septuagint (= Ezra-Nehemiah of the Masoretic text and the English Bible) is that the former is an older Septuagint version and the latter is Theodotion’s version.

     Some time after Theodotion another Greek version of the Old Testament was made by Symmachus, who belonged to the Jewish-Christian sect of the Ebionites. His aim seems to have been an idiomatic Greek version, and his method of operation was thus as far removed as possible from Aquila’s.

     The grandson and translator of Jesus ben Sira, in his prologue to his grandfather’s book (Ecclesiasticus), implies that about 132 B.C. a great part of the Old Testament (possibly all of it) was available in Greek. ‘Things originally spoken in Hebrew’, he says, ‘have not the same force in them, when they are translated into another tongue: and not only these, but the law itself, and the prophecies, and the rest of the books, have no small difference, when they are spoken in their original language’. [The question of the Apocrypha might be appropriately raised here, but it is dealt with separately in Chapter XIII.]

     When the Gospel began to spread among Greek-speaking Jews and Gentiles, the Septuagint was the form of the Old Testament used by Christians in worship, teaching and evangelization. But when we say ‘Septuagint’ at this stage, we mean simply the Greek Old Testament in the variant forms in which it circulated at the time. When we examine the Old Testament quotations which appear in the New Testament, † we find that while many are taken from the Septuagint in one of the forms in which it has been handed down to our day,†† and others seem to be translated directly for the occasion from the Hebrew original, others appear to have been derived from forms of the Greek Old Testament which did not survive.

     [† Dr. B. F. C. Atkinson contributed a valuable study of ‘The Textual Background of the Use of the Old Testament in the New,’ to the Journal of Transactions of the Victoria Institute, 79 (1947), pp. 39 ff.]

     [†† The New Testament writers who quote most closely from the Septuagint (in a form in which it has been preserved to us) are Luke (with the exception of the first two chapters of his Gospel) and the writer to the Hebrews. The writer who deviates most from the Septuagint in his Old Testament quotations is Matthew (especially in those which are peculiar to his Gospel). The quotation in Heb. 1. 6, ‘And let all the angels of God worship Him’, is referred in the A.V. margin to ‘Deut. 32.43, LXX’. No such words will be found in Deut. 32. 43 in the A.V. or R.V., which represent the Masoretic text. But the Septuagint text of that verse is longer than the Masoretic; it runs:

          Rejoice, ye heavens, along with Him,

               And let the sons of God worship Him;

          Rejoice, ye nations, with His people,

               And let all the angels of God be strong in Him:

          For He takes vengeance for the blood of His children,

               And will avenge it, and recompense justice upon their foes;

          And to those that hate Him will He render recompense,

               And the Lord will purify the land of His people.

     [Heb. 1. 6 may echo either the second or fourth lines of this octet, or rather a conflation of the two, neither of which appears in the Masoretic text. But the reference margin of the R.V. at Heb. 1. 6 gives a further reference to Ps. 97. 7 (Worship Him, all ye gods), where the Septuagint has: ‘Worship Him, all ye His angels’.

     [It may be added here that the student of the English Bible can use no better edition than the R.V. with the Revisers’ reference margins (these are not to be confused with the commoner margins mainly devoted to variant readings and renderings).]

     The quotations from or allusions to Daniel in the book of Revelation were probably made with reference to the Greek version of Daniel that lies behind Theodotion’s revision of that book. Dr. Kahle makes a detailed study of the quotation of Isa. 42. 1-4 in Matt. 12. 18-21 and concludes: ‘There can be no doubt that Matthew quoted here a translation of Isaiah which differed from the translation which we find in the Christian “Septuagint”.’ He continues: ‘We have to assume that yet other forms of text existed in the MSS. of the Greek Bible which were in the hands of the early Christians’. [The Cairo Geniza, pp. 166-167.] (A further influence on the form of some Old Testament quotations in the New Testament has been mentioned above in our discussion of the Targums. [See pp. 131 ff.]

     People who believe in the divine inspiration of Scripture need not be disturbed by the varying ways in which the Old Testament is quoted in the New, of course, because it follows from that belief that the New Testament writers were divinely guided in the form in which they quoted an Old Testament passage.

     Just as the Jews of Alexandria realized the need for a standard text of the Greek Pentateuch, however, so Greek-speaking Christians came to feel the need of a standard text of the whole Greek Old Testament. When this standard text was fixed, in the early centuries A.D., variant forms of the Greek Old Testament fell into disuse, and only fragments of them have survived. When we speak or read of the Septuagint, then, what we understand in practice is that particular form of the Greek Old Testament, handed down from pre-Christian Alexandria, which the Church adopted in preference to variant forms as her standard Greek text of the Old Testament. The one exception to this definition is, as we have said, the book of Daniel, for which the Church adopted the Theodotionic version instead of the old Alexandrian version.

     The most important name in the history of the Christian text of the Septuagint is that of the great Alexandrian scholar, Origen (A.D. 185-254). In later life, when he had taken up residence at Caesarea in Palestine, Origen produced a masterpiece of Biblical learning which is called the Hexapla (Greek for ‘sixfold’) because it was an edition of the Old Testament in six parallel columns. The first column contained the Hebrew text in Hebrew script, the second contained the same text transliterated into Greek script, the third and fourth contained the Greek versions of Aquila and Symmachus respectively, the fifth contained Origen’s own edition of the Septuagint text, the sixth contained Theodotion’s version. In some parts of the Old Testament, especially the Psalms, further columns were added, containing other Greek versions in addition to the four just mentioned: these others are known as the ‘Fifth’, ‘Sixth’ and ‘Seventh’ Greek versions. They were probably variant forms of Greek text which had survived to Origen’s day; he found the ‘Sixth’, it is interesting to note, in a jar near Jericho (along with some other Hebrew and Greek books), but not necessarily (as some have hastily concluded) in the now famous cave at Ain Feshkha.

     If Origen’s Hexapla had survived entire, it would be a treasure beyond price. Column 1 would have given most welcome information on the Hebrew text current in the first half of the third century; Column 2 would have thrown a flood of light on the disputed question of the pronunciation of Hebrew (especially the Hebrew vowels); the other columns would have given us equally valuable information about the Greek versions in Origen’s time. The fragments of the Hexapla that have been preserved whet our unsatisfied appetite for the vast bulk of the work that has not been preserved. The standard edition of the surviving fragments of the Hexapla is F. Field’s Origenis Hexapla quae supersunt, published at Oxford in two volumes in 1875; twenty years later about 150 verses of the Psalms in Columns 2 to 6 inclusive were found by Cardinal Giovanni Mercati in the Ambrosian Library at Milan; some other Hexapla fragments and portions of Aquila’s translation of the books of Kings were among the discoveries from the Cairo genizah.

     Origen’s Hexapla was preserved at Caesarea until the Saracen conquest of the seventh century, and there it was accessible to later scholars such as Pamphilus, Eusebius, and Jerome.

     In editing the Septuagint for the fifth column of the Hexapla, Origen aimed at bringing it into greater conformity with the Hebrew text of the first column.     By an elaborate system of critical signs he indicated passages where the Septuagint omitted something which was present in the Hebrew, or added something which was not in the Hebrew. Unfortunately, Origen’s successors and copyists did not all preserve these signs accurately when they transcribed his Septuagint text, and this led to the dissemination of a corrupted text. Two other scholars who undertook later recensions of the Septuagint were martyrs in the last great persecution of Christians under the Roman Empire―Hesychius of Alexandria, and Lucian of Antioch. It was Lucian’s recension, based on a conflation of divergent readings, which was adopted as the standard form of the Greek Old Testament in the Church of Constantinople, and so throughout Greek-speaking Christendom down to the present day.

     [The two most convenient editions of the Septuagint are that by H. B. Swete in three volumes (Cambridge, 1909), and that by A. Rahlfs in two volumes (Stuttgart, 1935). Publication of the large critical Cambridge edition by the late A. E. Brooke, N. MacLean and H. St. J. Thackeray began in 1906 and is thus far about half complete.]

     What is the value of the Septuagint for us? Firstly, it represents an underlying Hebrew text a thousand years older than the Masoretic text of our Hebrew manuscripts.Hence the importance which the speaker whom we mentioned at the outset of this chapter attached to the ability to translate from the Septuagint back into Hebrew. But the antiquity of the Septuagint as compared with our surviving manuscripts of the Hebrew Bible must not lead us to exaggerate its textual value. As a translation it is very unequal; the Pentateuch has been done much more carefully than the rest of the Old Testament. The translation of some parts of the Old Testament shows very indifferent workmanship indeed. The Septuagint is a useful adjunct to our Hebrew manuscripts in the textual criticism of the Old Testament; it can never take their place. There are several places where the Septuagint has preserved the true text which has become obscured in the Hebrew transmission, but these are very few in comparison with the places where the Septuagint has mistranslated the Hebrew.

     Here are three places where the Septuagint has preserved part of the original text which our Hebrew manuscripts have lost.

     (a) Gen. 4. 8. Here the Masoretic text says, ‘And Cain said unto Abel his brother’, but does not tell us what he said. The Authorized and Revised Versions try to help out the awkwardness thus caused by translating respectively ‘And Cain talked with Abel his brother’ and ‘And Cain told Abel his brother’. Neither of these is an exact translation, but the Revised margin indicates the original text when it says, ‘Many ancient authorities have, said unto Abel his brother, Let us go into the field’. The ancient authorities are the Septuagint and Samaritan texts. And Cain’s suggestion to Abel, ‘Let us go into the field’, prepares us for the next sentence: ‘And it came to pass, when they were in the field, that Cain rose up against Abel his brother, and slew him’.

     (b) 1 Sam. 14. 41. The Authorized Version makes Saul say to God, ‘Give a perfect lot’ (margin: Shew the innocent); the Revised Version has ‘Shew the right’ (margin: Give a perfect lot). The Hebrew words in question should really be translated ‘Give Thummim’, but the difficulty in the reading is due to the accidental omission of some words from the Masoretic text. The Septuagint has preserved these words, and indicates that the verse originally ran as follows:

     ‘And Saul said, O Jehovah, God of Israel, why hast thou not answered thy servant this day? If the iniquity be in me or in Jonathan my son, Jehovah, God of Israel, give Urim; but if thou shouldest say that the iniquity is in thy people Israel, give Thummim. And Saul and Jonathan were taken by lot, and the people escaped’.

     The whole narrative becomes lucid, and incidentally welcome light is thrown upon the operation of the priestly oracle, the Urim and Thummim, which apparently could only indicate one of two alternatives in response to each inquiry.

     [Note also that, as the Revisers’ margin points out, the Septuagint text of 1 Sam. 14. 18 makes Saul say to Ahijah, not ‘Brin ghither the Ark of God…’, but ‘Bring hither the ephod. For he wore the ephod at that time before Israel.’ The ephod, not the ark, was the sacred object with which the oracular Urim and Thummim was associated.]

     (c) 1 Kings 8. 12 f. The Masoretic text, represented by our English versions, makes Solomon say: ‘Jehovah said that he would dwell in the thick darkness.

     I have surely built thee an house of habitation, a place for thee to dwell in for ever’. But the Septuagint reading of this passage, which it places not between verses 11 and 14 but after verse 53, runs thus:

     ‘Then spake Solomon concerning the house when he had finished building it:

               Jehovah set the sun in the heavens,

               But he hath determined to dwell in darkness.

               I have built an house of habitation for thee,

               [Or (quoting a divine oracle):

               ‘Build a house of habitation for me.’]

               A place to dwell in eternally.

     (Behold, is it not written in the book of the song?).’

     The Septuagint has thus preserved in translation a quatrain of Hebrew poetry. The parenthetic note which follows it may mean that this quatrain was included in a collection of songs or poems, but the similarity in Hebrew script between ‘book of the song’ (sēpher ha-shīr) and ‘book of Jashar’ (sēpher ha-yāshār) suggests that what the Septuagint has preserved is a further item from that treasury of Hebrew poetry from which the poems in Joshua 10. 12-13 and 2 Samuel 1. 19-27 are quoted.

     These are but three interesting examples of the way in which the evidence of the Septuagint can be used to throw light on the original text of the Old Testament. But the importance of the Septuagint is not restricted to the field of textual and literary criticism. It should in any case be evident that the version of the Old Testament which was so largely used by the New Testament writers and the Church of the first centuries cannot wisely be neglected, because for that very reason, if for no other; it made an immeasurable contribution to Christianity.

     It is not always realized that the New Testament writers’ task of recording the Gospel in Greek was made easier because the Septuagint already existed. They did not have to invent a Greek

theological vocabulary; such a vocabulary lay ready to hand in the Septuagint. The general religious vocabulary of the Greek language was pagan in character, but several elements of that pagan vocabulary had been taken by the Alexandrian translators and used as equivalents of the great words of Old Testament revelation. Thus it came about that in Greek-speaking Jewish circles these words did not bear their original pagan significance but the new significance which they acquired from the Hebrew vocabulary which they represented.

     One instance is the Greek word translated ‘law’―nomos. In Greek the fundamental sense of nomos is ‘custom’, ‘convention’. To the Greeks, law was codified custom. But the Septuagint translators used this word to translate Hebrew tōrāh, which strictly means ‘instruction’. To the Hebrews law meant not codified custom, but divine instruction imparted through the spokesmen of God, Moses and his successors. Thus, when the Septuagint translators used nomos to translate tōrāh they gave nomos a new connotation, which it retains in New Testament and Christian Greek.

     Much the same took place with regard to a number of other words, including names and titles of divine beings, psychological terms, and words denoting such things as righteousness, mercy and truth, sin and atonement. It is particularly important to understand the New Testament words for atonement, sacrifice, forgiveness, propitiation and reconciliation, not in their pagan Greek senses, but in the senses in which they were used in the Septuagint to render the corresponding Hebrew words. Take, for example, the verb hilaskomai (propitiate) and cognate words. In pagan Greek usage hilaskomai denotes the appeasing of the wrath of a capricious power by offering him a gift or by enduring his vengeance or in some other way. But in the Septuagint it is used as the equivalent of the great Hebrew term kipper, ††† the word used in the Old Testament for the wiping out of sin by a gracious and righteous Covenant-God when the penitent worshipper acknowledged his wrongdoing.‡

     [††† The form kipper is the pi’el or intensive form of kāphar. In the simple (qal) form kāphar is used of wiping oir daubing Noah’s ark with pitch (kōphar     ): this passage (Gen. 6. 14) is the only Old Testament instance of the qal. The intensive kipper means not merely ‘wipe’ but ‘wipe away’, ‘wipe out’.]

     [‡Whether the repentance was ritually expressed by animal sacrifice, or took the form of the offering to God of ‘a broken and a contrite heart’ (Psalm 51. 17).]

     Other words derived from the same root in Old Testament Hebrew which belong to the same context are kappōreth, ‘mercy-seat’, [The same concept is expressed by the ‘throne of grace’ (Gk. thronos tēs chariots) in Heb. 4. 16.] the place where sin is wiped out, kippūrīm, ‘atonement’ (as in yōm kippūrīm, ‘the day of atonement’), and kōpher, ‘ransom’. In the Septuagint kipper is rendered by hilaskomai or its intensive form exilaskomai, kappōreth by hilastērion, kippūrīm by hilasmos or the intensive exilasmos. These Greek words thus take on the meanings of their Hebrew equivalents instead of the meanings which they had in Greek paganism, and convey ‘the sense of performing an act whereby guilt or defilement is removed’.

     [C. H. Dodd, The Bible and the Greeks (1935), p. 93. The opening chapters of this book contain many examples of the modification of Greek terms through their use in the Septuagint.]

     And in this sense the verb hilaskomai and its cognates lay ready to the hand of New Testament writers when they wished to speak of propitiation, not in the pagan sense of appeasing a vengeful deity, but in the Christian sense of God’s removing in Christ the obstacle which impeded the free flow of His grace to men.

     [In the New Testament, hilaskomai appears in Luke 18. 13 and Heb. 2. 17; hilasmos in 1 John 2. 2 and 4. 10; hilastērion in Rom. 3. 25 and Heb. 9. 5. In Heb. 9. 5 it means the literal mercy-seat; in Rom. 3. 25 the same idea may be conveyed figuratively of Christ or the word may be used adjectivally of Him in the sense ‘propitiatory’. The most important point to notice in all these Biblical uses of these words is that they denote an act in which God takes the initiative. See also W. E. Vine, Expository Dictionary of New Testament Words, s.v. Propitiation (Vol. III, p. 223).]

     E. W. Grinfield, one of the great Septuagint scholars of last century, expressed the opinion that ‘whoever studies the Greek New Testament in conjunction with the Septuagint will obtain such a conception of the unity of the Bible, as never could be obtained from the study of two discordant languages’; [An Apology for the Septuagint (1850), p. 99.] and although much more has been learned about these subjects since then, his words may still be profitably heeded.

     Again, the Septuagint was a great missionary work. Although it was primarily a translation undertaken to meet the requirements of Greek-speaking Jews, it did incidentally make the Old Testament revelation accessible to the Gentile world. Indications are not lacking in the pagan Greek literature of the last three centuries B.C. that it was known and appreciated in some Greek circles. The Hebraistic style of its Greek could never have been pleasing to a Greek ear, but its contents had their own appeal.

     [More than one writer, for example, has suggested that the pastoral idylls of the Greek poet, Theocritus (325-267) betray some acquaintance with the LXX version of the Song of Songs. Sir J. Mahaffy, in his History of Classical Greek Literature, i (1880), p. 417, n. 1, speaks of the eighteenth idyll of Theocritus ‘as perhaps containing the only direct allusion to Hebrew literature which is to be found in classical Greek poetry,’ and draws several parallels between it and passages in the Song of Songs.     Similar arguments were adduced by D. S. Margoliouth in Lines of Defence of the Biblical Revelation (1903), pp. 2 ff.; but at a later date Margoliouth interpreted the evidence in the contrary sense and suggested that the Song of Songs was dependent on Theocritus (New Commentary on Holy Scripture, S.P.C. K. [1928], p. 413).]

     The unknown author of a Greek treatise On Sublimity in Style includes among examples of such sublimity one from the Old Testament:

     “So, too, the Jewish lawgiver, no ordinary man, having formed a worthy conception of the divine power, gave expression to it at the very threshold of his Laws, where he says: ‘God said’―what? ‘Let there be light,’ and there was light. “Let there be earth”, and there was earth’ (9. 8).”

     He gives the sense rather than exact quotation of Genesis 1. 3, 9; but the source of his information was pretty certainly the Septuagint.

     By thus helping to disseminate the knowledge of the living and true God outside Israel the Septuagint paved the way for Christian missionary enterprise among the Gentiles. For the Septuagint was the Bible which the earliest heralds of the Gospel took in their hands as they went on their missionary journeys throughout the Roman Empire, in the earliest decades when as yet there was no New Testament. And when the New Testament was complete, they did not jettison the Old, but added the New Testament in the Greek original to the Old Testament in the Greek translation, thus making up the Greek Bible. The great Greek Biblical manuscripts―the Sinaitic, Vatican and Alexandrian codices, the Chester Beatty collection, and others―are manuscripts of the whole Greek Bible, and are thus witnesses to the text both of the Greek New Testament and of the Septuagint. The Septuagint had thus, in the providence of God, a great and honourable part to play in preparing the world for the Gospel. ‘Greek Judaism with the Septuagint had ploughed the furrows for the gospel seed in the Western world’. [A. Deissmann, New Light on the New Testament (1907), p. 95.]

Chapter 13―The Apocryphal Books

     John Bunyan relates in his autobiography, Grace Abounding, how once, during a time of great depression, he found great comfort from a verse which came to his mind: ‘Look at the generations of old and see; did ever any trust in the Lord and was confounded?’ He could not remember where it came from, and being curious to track it down, searched his Bible, but could not find it. Nor could other Christians, whom he asked, help him in his quest. Then, after the lapse of a year, he writes, ‘casting my eye upon the Apocrypha books, I found it in Ecclesiasticus, chap.2. 10. This at first did somewhat daunt me, because it was not in those texts that we call holy and canonical; yet as this sentence was the sum and substance of many of the promises, it was my duty to take the comfort of it. And I bless God for that word, for it was of good to me.     That word doth still oft-times shine before my face’.

     It is now time to consider these ‘Apocrypha books’, as Bunyan called them, from which he derived such timely comfort, although they did not belong to ‘those texts that we call holy and canonical’.

     The sixth Anglican Article of Religion, after listing the thirty-nine canonical books of the Old Testament, goes on: ‘And the other Books (as Hierome* saith) the Church doth read for example of life and instruction of manners; but yet doth it not apply them to establish any doctrine; such are these following:

                    The Third Book of Esdras,

                    The Fourth Book of Esdras,

                    The Book of Tobias,

                    The Book of Judith,

                    The rest of the Book of Esther,

                    The Book of Wisdom,

                    Jesus the Son of Sirach,

                    Baruch the Prophet,

                    The Song of the Three Children,

                    The Story of Susanna,

                    Of Bel and the Dragon,

                    The Prayer of Manasses,

                    The First Book of Maccabees,

                    The Second Book of Maccabees’.

     [*Jerome (Latin Hieronymus): in his prologue (the so-called Prologus Galeatus) to 1 and 2 Samuel (which he calls 1 and 2 Kings) he affirmed that any books not included in the 24 of the Hebrew Bible must be accounted apocryphal (i.e., non-canonical). On the other hand, he sometimes refers to the book of Jesus the son of Sirach (Ecclesiasticus) as ‘Scripture’, but this is probably an accommodation to popular usage. It is sometimes inferred from certain passages in Ecclesiasticus that it claims the status of Holy Scripture, but this is uncertain, and there is no evidence that it ever succeeded in gaining such status from Jewish authorities. (Sirach is a variant form of Sira.)]

     This is really a very varied assortment of Jewish literature of the period 300 B.C.-A.D. 100; what gives the collection its special interest is the fact that, while none of these books is included in the Hebrew Old Testament, they do (with one exception) form part of the Greek Old Testament. It is very often said that they formed part of the canon recognized by the Alexandrian Jews, but not by the Palestinian Jews; but this is an inaccurate way of stating the difference. There is no evidence that these books were ever regarded as canonical by any Jews, whether inside or outside Palestine, whether they read the Bible in Hebrew or in Greek. The books of the Apocrypha were first given canonical status by Greek-speaking Christians, quite possibly through a mistaken belief that they already formed part of an Alexandrian Canon. The Alexandrian Jews may have added these books to their versions of the Scriptures, but that was a different matter from canonizing them. As a matter of fact, the inclusion of the apocryphal books in the Septuagint may partly be due to ancient bibliographical conditions. When each book was a papyrus or parchment roll, and a number of such rolls were kept together in a box, it was quite likely that uncanonical documents might be kept in a box along with canonical documents, without acquiring canonical status. Obviously the connection between various rolls in a box is much looser than that between various documents which are bound together in a volume.

     The names of the apocryphal books given in the quotation above from Article VI are those which they bear in the Latin Vulgate translation; some of them are known by slightly different names in the English Bible; thus 3 and 4 Esdras in the above list are more commonly known to us as 1 and 2 Esdras, ** Tobias is known as Tobit, and ‘Jesus the son of Sirach’ is the book more generally referred to as Ecclesiasticus.

     [** The nomenclature of the Esdras books is extremely confusing.     These two books (1 and 2 Esdras in the English Apocrypha) are called 3 and 4 Esdras in Article VI because they are so called in the Latin Vulgate. In the Latin Vulgate 1 and 2 Esdras are the names given to our Ezra and Nehemiah respectively. In the Septuagint 1 Esdras is our apocryphal 1 Esdras, and 2 Esdras is our Ezra and Nehemiah. Our apocryphal 2 Esdras is not included in the Septuagint.]

     In surveying these books, it is convenient to divide them according to their literary character.

          1. Historical: 1 Esdras, 1 and 2 Maccabees.

          2. ‘Haggadah’, or Religious Fiction: Tobit, Judith, the Additions to Esther

           and the Additions to Daniel.

          3. ‘Wisdomand Ethical Literature: Ecclesiasticus, Wisdom, Baruch, Prayer

           of Manasseh.

          4. Apocalyptic: 2 Esdras.

     In the Septuagint these books (with the exception of 2 Esdras, which never belonged to the Septuagint) are generally arranged alongside canonical books of the same class. Thus 1 Esdras precedes Ezra and Nehemiah (but the books of Maccabees come after the Prophets), Judith and Tobit follow Esther, the Additions to Esther and Daniel appear as parts of the canonical books to which they are attached, Wisdom and Ecclesiasticus accompany the canonical Wisdom books (Job, etc.), Baruch is placed for obvious reasons after Jeremiah, and the Prayer of Manasseh is included in a collection of psalms and hymns which form an appendix to the Septuagint. More or less the same arrangement is followed in the Vulgate and in those versions which are translated from the Vulgate (such as the Douai version), but in other English versions from Coverdale’s Bible (1535) onward the apocryphal books have been placed together separately after the canonical books of the Old Testament.

     Let us now take a brief glance at these books and say something about their character and contents.

1. Historical

     1 Esdras contains most of the material found in the canonical Ezra, but takes up the tale at an earlier date, for it starts with the Passover celebration of the 18th year of King Josiah, and goes on

to tell the story of the closing years of the kingdom of Judah, closely following 2 Chron. 35. 1-36. 21. It ends with an account of the reading of the law by Ezra which is recorded in Neh. 8, but omits all mention of Nehemiah’s name from this account. 1 Esdras is, in fact, a variant Greek version of part of the Chronicler’s work (for, as we have seen, Chronicles-Ezra-Nehemiah are really one continuous historical work). Some scholars [In particular A. H. Sayce, H. St. John Thackeray and C. C. Torrey.] have thought that 1 Esdras was the original ‘Septuagint’ translation of that part of the Chronicler’s work which it contains. It is often called nowadays the ‘Greek Ezra’ as distinct from the ‘Hebrew Ezra’ (which is represented by the canonical Ezra). (The name Esdras is, of course, simply a Greek form of Ezra.)     The greater part of its contents appears also in the canonical literature, but there is one

section (1 Esdras 3. 1-5. 6) which tells of an intellectual competition between three young men belonging to the bodyguard of Darius 1 of Persia. The prize is awarded to one of the three named Zerubbabel, who has spoken in praise of Truth: it is from this story that we get the proverbial saying, ‘Great is truth and mighty above all things’. Darius bids him choose what he will as his prize, and he

asks the king to remember his vow to build Jerusalem. This story is also told by Josephus (Ant. xi. 3).

     1 Maccabees is our principal source for the attempt by Antiochus Epiphanes to suppress the Jewish religion and the consequent rising of the Hasmonean family and establishment of their dynasty; it carries the story down to the reign of John Hyrcanus (134-104 B.C.). It was written either towards the end of the second century B.C. or in the earlier part of the first century, and although it is no longer extant in any earlier form than the Greek version, it was certainly written originally in Hebrew. The Greek text bears several marks of translation from a Hebrew original, and we have a statement by Jerome that he found this book in Hebrew.

     2 Maccabees is not an original work; it is an abridgement of a longer history written some time about the middle of the first century B.C. by a Jew of Cyrene named Jason. The book relates

certain incidents incidents from the persecution under Antiochus and the Hasmonean revolt from a Pharisaic point of view, with marked emphasis on such things as the observance of the Sabbath and the certainty of a blessed resurrection for the martyrs. Its moralizing tendency is indulged at the expense of historical reality; as a source-book for the history of the period it is of much inferior value to 1 Maccabees.

     Some copies of the Septuagint have preserved two other ‘books of Maccabees’. Of these, 3 Maccabees has nothing to do with the Maccabees; it is chiefly concerned with an attempt by Ptolemy IV of Egypt (221-203 B.C.) to massacre the Jews of Alexandria and with their miraculous deliverance. 4 Maccabees uses the account of certain martyrdoms described in 2 Maccabees to illustrate the power of mind over matter. Both these books were written about the beginning of the Christian era; although extant in the Septuagint they are not found in the Vulgate, and so have not come to be reckoned among the apocryphal books known to Western Christendom.

2. ‘Haggadah’ or Religious Fiction

     The Book of Tobit was written about 200 B.C., and its original language was either Hebrew or Aramaic, though that original has not been preserved. It purports to tell the story of a pious Israelite named Tobit who was carried away by the Assyrians with many of his fellow-countrymen after the Fall of Samaria. The main purpose of the book is to illustrate the importance of observing

the law, with particular emphasis on deeds of charity. It contains features belonging to widespread folktales, and shows quite plainly the influence of Persian beliefs and practices. Good and bad angels play an important part in the story; when young Tobias, the son of Tobit, goes to a town of Media to collect from a kinsman some money belonging to his father, he is accompanied by the angel, Raphael, who, under the guise of a travelling companion, serves him very effectively as a guardian angel.

     When he arrives at his destination, he is able with Raphael’s help to drive away an evil spirit named Asmodaeus―who is a well-known character in Persian demonology, where his name appears in its original form, Aeshma-daeva, ‘wrathful demon’. The story has left its mark in common life in several interesting ways: the dog Toby traces his descent from the dog of Tobias, who accompanied his young master to Media; and the female name, Edna, first appears in literature as the name of Tobias’s mother-in-law.

     Judith forms a fierce contrast to the domestic charm of Tobit; it takes its name from a young Jewish widow who, by subjecting the heathen general, Holofernes, to her charm, finds an opportunity

to take off his head and thus delivers her city and people from destruction. The book contains the most atrocious historical blunders; Holofernes, for example, is the general of ‘Nebuchadnezzar, who reigned over the Assyrians in Nineveh’. If any historical situation at all is reflected in the book, it is an expedition to Syria and Asia Minor by the Persian king, Artaxerxes III (359-338 B.C.); the name Holofernes (Orophernes) was borne by a general of this king. But Judith is not history, but fiction, and it was probably written at some time during the campaigns of Judas Maccabaeus in order to stimulate the ardour of the Jewish patriots. It was originally written in Hebrew, but no fragment of the Hebrew original has been preserved.

     The additions to Esther were mainly intended to compensate for the absence of the name of God or of any note of true religion from the canonical book. They are popular expansions of the story of Esther, which may have been handed down orally before they were written down in Greek and added to the Greek version of the Hebrew and canonical book.

     The additions to Daniel are three in number: the story of Susanna, the story of Bel and the Dragon, and the Song of the Three Children. The story of Susanna gave rise to the proverb ‘a Daniel come to judgment’, made famous by Shakespeare in The Merchant of Venice. It tells how Daniel, as a young man, defended the good name of Susanna, a virtuous and beautiful Jewish lady, against the false accusations of two wicked old men, by examining her accusers separately and exposing the detailed inconsistency of their testimony. The story of Bel and the Dragon is an attack on idolatry. Daniel exposes the fraudulent conduct of the priests who tended the image of the god Bel, and compasses the death of a great dragon which is also worshipped by the Babylonians. The people in wrath demand his death, and he is cast into a lions’ den, where he is fed by the prophet, Habakkuk, who is transported by an angel from Palestine to Babylon for this purpose. On the seventh day the king finds Daniel still alive in the den, and has him taken out.

     The other addition to Daniel was inserted between verses 23 and 24 of chapter 3. It begins: ‘And they walked in the midst of the fire praising God and blessing the Lord’. Then comes a prayer for deliverance, put into the mouth of Azariah (Abednego), after which we read:

     ‘And the king’s servants that put them in ceased not to make the furnace hot with naphtha, pitch, tow and small wood; so that the flame streamed forth above the furnace forty and nine cubits. And it spread and burned those Chaldeans whom it found about the furnace. But the angel of the Lord came down into the furnace together with Azariah and his fellows, and he smote the flame of the fire out of the furnace; and made the midst of the furnace as it had been a moist whistling wind, so that the fire touched them not at all, neither hurt nor troubled them’.

     This is followed by an ascription of praise to God by the three Hebrews, which leads on to the Song proper, beginning ‘O all ye works of the Lord, bless ye the Lord; praise Him and magnify Him for ever’, which has won a secure place in Christian worship as the canticle Benedicite omnia opera.

     The Song proper and the Prayer of Azariah seem originally to have been independent compositions and to have been adapted later to the narrative of the three faithful Hebrews in Daniel 3. The language of the Prayer reflects the conditions of the persecution under Antiochus Epiphanes. The stories of Susanna and of Bel and the Dragon may be dated very roughly round 100 B.C. All the additions to Daniel were probably composed at first in Hebrew or Aramaic.

3. ‘Wisdom’ and Ethical Literature

     The Apocrypha include two important contributions to Jewi